JP2022069666A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the attention degree of to a game.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed. When a winning occurs at an operating port provided in the game area, an MPU 402 of a main control device 162 executes a transition lottery to an opening/closing execution mode, and the variation display time of a symbol in an operating port display section of a main display unit 87 is determined. Information such as the result of the transition lottery and the variation display time is input from the main control device 162 to a notification/performance control device 140. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 140 determines a performance mode in a symbol display device 253 on the basis of the information. As the performance mode in the symbol display device 253, a normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided. In the special performance mode, the last special performance of the game round is executed so as to be over the variation display and the confirmation display of the operating port display section.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, is generated, and a pattern is drawn. The variable display starts. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player.
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game turn control means has a period determining means for determining an operation period of the game turn operation and a maintenance period in which the notification result is maintained for each game turn.
A production execution means for performing an effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is performed is provided.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect execution means continuously executes the predetermined effect during one game rotation. Has continuous execution means,
The continuous execution means is characterized in that the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round is executed so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period in the game round.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the rear. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the back pack unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the pass / fail table. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a per-type and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. (A) A flowchart showing a variation display time setting process, (b) a schematic diagram showing a variation display time table for non-reach reference in the low frequency support mode, and (c) reference in the high frequency support mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table for non-reach occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the notification / staging control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special effect mode. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the flow of quasi-continuous variation display. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the color of the effect and the degree of expectation of a big hit. (A) A schematic diagram showing the display contents in the time saving effect mode, and (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the game effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game production in the time saving production mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command executed by the MPU of a main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the advance notice effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the variable display mode in each effect mode. (A) A flowchart showing an effect setting process for a special effect mode executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device, and (b) a flowchart showing a special effect setting process for reach. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern setting process for reach. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the first special pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the second special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 1st special production pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game production by the 2nd special production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process for complete removal. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st setting process. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the fifth special pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the sixth special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game effect by the 5th special pattern and the 6th special pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the ninth special pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the tenth special pattern table. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game effect by the 9th special pattern and the 10th special pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the inverse proportion. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the start timing of the reach display and the number of parts in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for cooperation executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the game times before and after. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the fixed display time of a picture, and the stop display time of a picture. (A) A flowchart showing a standby display control process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a variable display mode and whether or not standby display is possible. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of a game rotation production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the fixed display time of a picture, and the stop display time of a picture.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members on four sides and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the like.

The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. The support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is arranged behind the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a back pack unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. There is.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination unit 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window unit 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when a problem such as an error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the left and right of the error display lamp unit 27, during the payout of prize balls. A illuminating prize ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, speaker units 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state are provided at positions close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3). In the speaker unit 29, the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by switching the BGM or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game in which the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism do not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 3). When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a saucer for storing the discharged game ball.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later. The rate of fire of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to reach a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. It will reach the region PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it is possible to separate the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The front door side upper plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are connected to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper plate passage are guided to the upper plate 33 and are guided to the front door side lower side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and by inserting the bearing portions provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft portions, the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the hook member 76 for the front door is arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. In the inner frame base body 50, a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 of the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 corresponds to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the hook receiving member 49 provided on the front door frame 14 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door. The frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 (see FIG. 4) extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 77 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). And the lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked.

A storage recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodating recess is recessed in the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 is fixed to the accommodating recess 51 in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine by a manual lock mechanism. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the accommodating recess 51, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear surface block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. The window hole 52 is in a state where almost the entire area thereof is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the front side of the game area PE on which the game area PE flows down and on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and various game parts (for example, variable display unit, control) described later. The device, the movable staging mechanism, the decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b mounted on the base body 251. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front surface portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As described above, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in front and behind at the same place. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game area forming body 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each winning portion, and the detection result thereof. A predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player based on the above. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area forming body 80a, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 89, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b is also referred to as "winning". Express.

Further, in the game area forming body 80a, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine 94 are arranged. Has been done. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the nail member 93, the wind turbine 94, and the like, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back surface side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). There is. In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is displayed by a two-dot chain line to show a state in which the variable display unit 252 can be visually recognized.

Actuating ports 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. The actuating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper actuating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower actuating port 83b arranged directly under the upper actuating port 83a, and particularly the lower actuating port 83b. The (lottery trigger entry section) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening / closing assisting device (entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit so that the ball can enter the lower operating port 83b. It is possible to switch between a possible open state (auxiliary state) and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the same ball cannot enter. As for the closed state of the electric accessory 91, it is sufficient if it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state, and it is not always necessary to prohibit the entry of the ball.

The through gate 84 is arranged at a position on the upstream side (more specifically, the side of the variable display unit 252) of the lower operating port 83b in the game area PE, and the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 will be switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower operating port 83b over the upper operating port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower operating port 83b to be larger than the number of payouts related to the upper operating port 83a.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening leading to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing) for opening / closing the large winning opening. An opening / closing door is provided as a means). The opening / closing door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the same ball cannot enter. Further, the opening / closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and the opening / closing door is normally kept closed and an internal lottery is performed. When the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) is won in the above (big hit: when the transition result to the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), the open state can be switched. It has become. As for the closed state of the open / close door, it is sufficient if it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state, and it is not always necessary to prevent the ball from entering.

The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (for example, 4, 8 and 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round. It is set so that the opening and closing doors are repeatedly opened up to the upper limit.

Here, the variable display unit 252 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbol of the predetermined combination (symbol combination) is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). .. The symbol display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from the front surface side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 95 stands up from the front surface of the game area forming body 80a. The gap between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that detours from the left side and a route that detours from the left side.

A stage portion on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower portion of the center frame 95. The game balls flowing in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. Contributes to. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball that has reached the stage portion is restricted from moving to the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252) side. Has been done.

The actuating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since it is possible to shift to the special gaming state by triggering the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the player pays attention to whether or not the operating ports 83a and 83b are won and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 253. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 252.

At the right end of the game area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the game board unit 80 described later), a game area partition member 99 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with the guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member on which the game ball flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collides with the main display unit 87. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 87 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display unit D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D has a display unit UD for the upper operating port that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating unit that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b. It has a mouth display unit LD. In the display unit UD for the upper operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 83a, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a is performed. The result of is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit for the upper operating port, and the stop result is predetermined. After the pattern of is displayed, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode.

In the display unit LD for the lower operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 83b, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is performed. The result of is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the display unit LD for the lower operating port, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display units UD and LD, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the corresponding operation port is concerned. Until the predetermined stop display time (confirmed display time) elapses (until the confirmed display ends) while the pattern is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is awarded to any of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the single display area is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed, and then the final display is completed. It is also possible to set one of the game times. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to start the variable display of the pattern on the display units UD and UL for each operating port when the internal lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and the operating ports 83a and 83b are displayed. It is also possible to start the internal lottery based on the prize before the execution.

Further, in addition to the above both display units, the main display unit D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a through gate display unit that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 84. In the through gate display unit, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as the stop result of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown. Will be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower actuating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of holdings is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 87. A display unit for the number of holdings to be held is provided.

The main display unit D described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of the main display unit D. The visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 5, a game ball is launched into the game area PE below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. The ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and the base plate 114 to which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as the main configurations, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50 to provide the same. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined up toward the game area forming body 80a side. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove-shaped portion.

A ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is arranged at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game area forming body 80a side, in detail. Is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 99 fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. There is. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both rails 101 and 102 form a section of the guide passage 103. Has been done. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game area forming body 80a, on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103. Is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to deliver the game ball to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guidance passage 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the region along the inner rail 101 is a region in which the game ball does not substantially pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112, the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a interposed therebetween. Is located in. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game area forming body 80a, and a gap is formed at a predetermined interval between the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage through the above gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled as a single unit during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time, the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member mounted in view of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function for preventing the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors or the like.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the door. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is urged at a front position that closes the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, the game balls are prevented from falling out from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess (game board accommodating portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game area forming body 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging a movable effect mechanism, a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like, and the back side thereof is a control device for controlling various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (design display device). It is the arrangement area of 253).

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back surface side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 253 is attached. The symbol display device 253 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 96 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box can be inserted by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are designed so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after opening the package. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the board box 163 is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the board box 163 main body is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably coupled to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b, and is downstream. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place on the side is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 81 or the like are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b has, as the detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entry portions, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball won in the general winning opening 81 and the operating port 83a. , 83b is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and the winning detection mechanism is configured by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211. Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal board 213, and the wiring WH1 connecting the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to these output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state and game status of the pachinko machine 10 based on these various signals. It is structured to grasp.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearing pin 214 is provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and is open upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function for distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and to lead the outer opening to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball derived from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply / emission control device 243, the power supply / emission control board is housed in the substrate box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the cutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 166 provided in the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main portion 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine to expose the back portion of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. That is, it is difficult to operate the above-mentioned various switches when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is closed, and the operation from the front side of the gaming machine by a person who does not have the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster). Is difficult.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

The MPU 402 is mounted on the main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402 and a control program stored in the ROM 403. It is an element having a built-in RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404 are provided as another element.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 402, a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like are connected. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

As a part of various detection sensors, the ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects the entry (winning) into the general winning opening 81, the entry ball detection sensor 391b that detects the entry (winning) into the variable winning device 82, and the upper operation The ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects the entry (winning) into the mouth 83a, the entry detection sensor 391d that detects the entry (winning) into the lower operating port 83b, and the entry (winning) into the through gate 84 are detected. The ball entry detection sensor 391e is connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry unit. Further, in the MPU 402, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball portion corresponding to the winning, such as the above-mentioned operating ports 83a and 83b. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the above is output, and when the prize to the upper operating port 83a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and the prize to the lower operating port 83b is output. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing an opening / closing body (for example, a shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and an electric accessory driving unit for opening / closing the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b. The main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 402 executes display control of the main display unit D of the main display unit 87.

Further, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal board 213, the management control device (hole computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power supply / emission control device 243, and the power failure monitoring board 405 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc. is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification / effect control device 140 is provided with a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU is a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be individually chipped. The MPU of the notification / effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display. It controls 410.

The display control device 410 executes the display control of the symbol display device 253 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 140, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect, etc.) and the symbol are based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The stop display mode (type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, and for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the background image and the like displayed on the display screen 253a is omitted.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12 (a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 12 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13A, on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, on the display screen 253a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 253a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display was stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) was formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in the state, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The 2 symbol row) and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a 3rd symbol row (or a 3rd symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols" and have even numbers (2,4,6,8). The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 253 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

A hold display is placed at the bottom of the display screen 253a, specifically below the variable display area ME composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol column, the variable display area for the middle symbol column, and the variable display area for the lower symbol column. The area is set. The hold display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 83a are arranged in the left-right direction, and the same number as the hold information related to the upper operation port 83a. The holding number display area Da for the upper operating port that can display the holding image in the unit display area and the unit holding display area of the same number as the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b are arranged in the left-right direction. Execution in the hold number display area Db for the lower working port and the variable display area ME, which can display the same number of hold images as the hold information related to the lower working port 83b in the unit display area. It is composed of an execution target display area in which a hold image corresponding to the game times in the middle can be displayed.

More specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating opening 83a, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area Da for the upper operating opening is the first unit holding display area. The second unit hold display area, the third unit hold display area, and the fourth unit hold display area are set. Further, when the game ball wins the lower operating port 83b, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area Db for the lower operating opening has the first unit holding display area and the second. The unit hold display area, the third unit hold display area, and the fourth unit hold display area are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area, and the game ball is moved to the upper operating port 83a. When the number of reserved images is four when a prize is won, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area. In FIG. 11B, the case where the number of holdings in the upper operating port 83a is 3 and the number of holdings in the lower operating port 83b is 2 is illustrated. In the following description, the "holding number" is also simply referred to as the "holding number".

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D), setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 253, and the like. As shown in FIG. 14, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating big hits, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type such as the probabilistic big hit result and the normal big hit result, and the symbol display device 253 The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the deviation fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the design on the operation port display units UD and LD of the main display unit 87. It is decided to use a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time and the variation display time of the symbol on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (the effect execution time including the temporary stop time described later). Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a holding ball storage area 432 including an upper working port holding area Ra, a lower working opening holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area.

The holding ball storage area 432 includes a holding area including a holding area Ra for the upper working port and a holding area Rb for the lower working port, and an execution area AE. Each of the holding areas Ra and Rb includes a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter buffer 431 is set according to the winning history of the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in is stored in any of the first area to the fourth area as the above-mentioned hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of areas. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b can be reserved and stored. Further, a total reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 432, and the number of winning histories stored in the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b is specified in the total reserved number storage area. Information for doing so is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area when the variable display of the pattern is started on the display units UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit 87. 1. At the start of one game, a winning / failing determination is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating opening holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 421 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, as the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. .. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to in the lottery, the values of the random numbers that win the big hit (that is, the winning information) are "7" and "307". , "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit result. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15B) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", " 36 ”,“ 107 ”,“ 307 ”...“ 407 ”,“ 507 ”. There are 30 of "598". That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "307" ... "407", "507", "598" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Incidentally, if the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

In each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that is the big hit.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 91 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

As a support mode by the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b, the electric combination of the lower operating port 83b is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency) so that the frequency with which the object 91 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low. Guide state) is set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same, but the probability is high. In the support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 91 is in the open state when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 91 is won in the open state and the electric accessory 91 is opened multiple times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the lower operating port 83b will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 83a is higher than that of the lower operating port 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 83b is more likely than the upper operating port 83a. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is won in the lower operating port 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. be able to.

The specific configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory is open. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in the lottery. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one of the conditions of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability, or any combination of the conditions.

The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b wins a prize. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating opening holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in.

The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the distribution table, the distribution table for the upper operating port (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16A and the distribution table for the lower operating port shown in FIG. 16B (second distribution). Minute information group) and is set.

In the distribution table for the upper operating port, the 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), the 8R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result), and the 4R probability variation jackpot result (high) are distributed to the game result. Probability-based game results), 4R normal jackpot results (low-probability-based game results) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and "9 to 14". "Corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 15-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and" 24-29 "corresponds to the 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower operating port, 16R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low) are distributed to the game result. Probability-corresponding special game result), 4R probability variation jackpot result (high-probability-corresponding game result), and 4R normal jackpot result (low-probability-corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and "6 to 11". "Corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot result," 12-17 "corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result," 18-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result, and" 24-29 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation jackpot result. 4R Normal jackpot results are supported.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), this high-frequency support mode is continued until the next big hit result, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the open / close execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. However, as shown in FIG. 16C, in this high-frequency support mode, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches the end reference number of times, or before the end reference number of times is reached, the jackpot result is obtained. When it becomes (for details, when the open / close execution mode is started), it ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As for the end reference number of times, any one of five times, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times will be set. In the present embodiment, the end reference number of times is not specified and the end timing of the high frequency support mode is hidden, so that it is difficult to identify how long the high frequency support mode continues. This is a device to suppress the monotonicization of the game in the high frequency support mode.

By the way, as described above, in some cases where the probability change jackpot result is obtained, the same symbol combination as the normal jackpot result is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display screen 253a, and it is possible to identify whether the result is normal or probability variation. It is configured to be difficult. However, when the high-frequency support mode continues more than 100 times, it is clear from the behavior of the electric accessory 91 that the high-frequency support mode is in the high-frequency support mode based on the probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 83a, and is stored in the lower operating opening holding area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball wins in the lower operating port 83b. Stored in. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is compatible with the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variation display can be a special display result in the game times that is the game result, the stop display result after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 253 is started. Refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode. It is a display state in which a reach symbol combination having a characteristic is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode on the preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a characteristic reach symbol combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

The display contents on the display screen 253a will be described in more detail. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbol with the numbers constituting the above, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach display is performed by displaying the variation of the symbol in the middle symbol row. Will be. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbol with the numbers constituting the hit symbol combination together with the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol row is displayed. It will be terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. This includes those that perform a reach effect by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS sets the variation display time in the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit of the main display unit 87 (main display unit D) and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 in the MPU 402. Used in determining. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display in the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 253.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b to the open state by the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 402, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the upper actuating port display unit and the lower actuating port display unit. The variable display time table storage area 423 is used. Further, in the MPU 402, the stop result in the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit is determined by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, in making the determination, the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 is used.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed for advancing the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 402, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 84. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area 433. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory hold area on condition that the number of accessory hold storages being stored is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated. do.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 and 19.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the upper operating port 83a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 242.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. In the following step S204, the value corresponding to the upper operating port 83a is read from the holding number storage area, and the start holding storage number RaN which is held and stored in the holding area Ra is set (hereinafter, the holding storage for the upper operating port). Also called number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 242. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the lower operation port 83b is read from the hold number storage area, and the start hold storage number RbN which is held and stored in the hold area Rb is set (hereinafter, the hold storage for the lower operation port). Also called number RbN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201 and S206, that is, if there is no ball in either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the operation hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432, specifically, the trigger of the information acquisition process among the upper operation port 83a and the lower operation port 83b. It is determined whether or not the operation hold storage number N (RaN or RbN described above) related to the ball entry portion is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the operation hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the operation hold storage number N of the corresponding operation port is incremented by 1 in step S302. , The total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303.

In the following step S304, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are stored in the free storage area of the hold area RE for the operation port. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the upper operating port is set, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103. Is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area Ra of the hold area Ra for the upper working port, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the upper working port incremented by 1 in step S302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the lower operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the lower operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the reservation area Rb for use, that is, the reservation area Rb corresponding to the start reservation storage number RbN for the lower working port incremented by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, display update processing is executed for the hold number display unit of the main display unit 87. In the display update process, when the current entry destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the hold number display unit for the upper operating port is updated, and the current entry destination (winning destination) operates downward. In the case of the port 83b, the display of the hold number display unit for the lower operating port is updated.

Each holding number display unit is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in the holding number display unit, the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 83a, and the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 83b are It has a matching configuration. When the number of holdings related to the upper working port 83a increases due to this prize, the number of LEDs lit in the holding number display unit for the upper working port is increased accordingly, and the lower working port 83b is subjected to the process. When the number of holdings is increased, the number of LEDs lit in the holding number display unit for the lower working port is increased accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the operation ports 83a and 83b have won a prize, and are held later. The confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process of the hold command, which are the processes for executing the notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. It should be noted that the hold command includes information on which of the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b is based on the winning.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S406 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S408 and S409 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. Further, if various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command described later are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. ..

Further, although the details will be described later, for example, every time the variable display of the pattern is completed on the display units UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit D, an external signal indicating that the design is confirmed is output to the hall computer HC and the opening / closing is executed. During the mode, an external signal indicating that the open / close execution mode is in operation is output to the hall computer HC, and when in the high frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in operation is output to the hall computer HC. do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S403, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game times control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 attached to the lower actuating port 83b is executed. In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the electric service 91 is used by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 433 of the RAM 404. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the through gate display unit in the main display unit D is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory 91, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Through this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory 91 is won, and once. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 91 is elected and the electric accessory 91 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

After that, in step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. To excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404. Further, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 404.

Since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control process)
Next, the game times control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 24.

In the game times control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game rounds are performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display units UD and LD for the operation port of the main display unit 87 are in the variable display or the definite display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S503 to S505. In the game round start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 432 for variable display is executed in step S504. Further, in step S505, after executing the variation start processing for starting the variation display of the operation port display unit in the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the symbol display device 253, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, among the operation hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the lower working port (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of holding storages N for the lower working port (reserved storage number RbN for the lower working port) is "0". do. When the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is "0", the data setting process related to the display unit UD for the upper operating port is executed, and when the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is not "0", the data is set lower. The data setting process related to the operation port display unit LD is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number RbN for the lower operating port is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the holding for the variable display of the display unit LD for the lower operating port is held. When the information is stored, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the upper operating port (see FIG. 14), that is, the number of operation hold storage N (the number of hold storage for the upper work port RaN) is Regardless of whether it is 1 or more, the data stored in the holding area Rb for the lower working port is moved to the execution area AE for variable display. That is, in step S602, when the holding information is stored in both the holding area Ra for the upper working port and the holding area Rb for the lower working port, the holding information corresponding to the lower working port 83b has priority. It becomes.

In the following step S603, the data stored in the first to fourth areas is stored for one of the upper working port holding area Ra and the lower working opening holding area Rb that has been moved to the execution area AE. To the lower area side in order. As a result, for example, with the movement of the data in the first area to the execution area AE, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. The data is shifted.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 140 to recognize that the data in the hold areas Ra and Rb has been shifted. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Then, this shift command is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification / effect control device 140.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S701, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. When the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the information grasped above becomes the information corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. If it is specified whether it is included and the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the above grasped information is a big hit by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S701 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, it is specified whether or not the information for the type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. For details, if the hold information corresponds to the entry into the upper operation port 83a, refer to the distribution table for the upper operation port 83a, and the hold information corresponds to the entry into the lower operation port 83b. If so, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result (16R probability variation jackpot result, 8R probability variation jackpot result, 4R probability variation jackpot result) based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. judge. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that the big hit is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S707.

The probability variation jackpot results are roughly classified into 16R probability variation jackpot results, 8R probability variation jackpot results, and 4R probability variation jackpot results. In the process of step S705, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot result is performed. In the case of a 4R probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R probability variation jackpot result is performed. Further, the normal jackpot result is roughly classified into an 8R normal jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. In the process of step S706, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of the 4R normal jackpot result, the stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed. conduct.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403. And the specified information is stored in the RAM 404. Further, in steps S705 and S706, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S705, any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, any of the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24A, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning or losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 4R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 253 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying whether or not reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to.

If an affirmative judgment is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the variation display time table for reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to this time. The variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time information is collected in the subsequent step S804 in the variation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. ) Fluctuation display time counter is set. After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the big hit winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display (specifically, normal reach A to B) and a super reach display (detailed, super reach A to C). In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variation type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variation type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the case of the probability variation jackpot result, and the non-specific symbol combination can be stopped and displayed in the case of the normal jackpot result. The variable display time is set.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, the value of the variation type counter CS this time is referred to with reference to the variation display time table for non-reach stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 in step S805. The variation display time corresponding to the above is acquired, and the variation display time information is set in the variation display time counter in the variation display time counter area in step S806. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the number of stored hold information (common hold number CRN) increases. Specifically, in the variation display time table for non-reach that is referred to during the low frequency support mode, when the number of stored information (holding number) is "4", it is 1 sec, "3". In the case of, it is specified to be 3 sec, in the case of "2", it is 5 sec or 7 sec, in the case of "1", it is 11 sec or 13 sec, and in the case of "0", it is 15 sec or 17 sec (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). b) See). On the other hand, in the variation display time table for non-reach that is referred to during the high frequency support mode, when the number of stored information (holding number) is "2" to "4", it is 1 sec. Or, it is specified to be 5 sec, 2 sec or 5 sec in the case of "1", and 5 sec or 8 sec in the case of "0" (see FIG. 24 (c)).

In the high frequency support mode, the frequency of entering the lower operating port 83b is increased by the support by the electric accessory 91, and the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 83b as long as the game ball is launched to the right route. Will change from "2" to "4". On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the hold information related to the upper operating port 83a is mainly used, and the number of hold information changes from "0" to "3". As a result, the game progress in the high frequency support mode is differentiated so as to be faster than the game progress in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the final display time of the pattern is 2 sec, whereas in the high frequency support mode, the final display time of the pattern is set to 1 sec, and the final display time is also set. It has been shortened. As a result, the game progress is further increased in speed.

When comparing the variable display time table for non-reach for low frequency support mode and the variable display time table for non-reach for high frequency support mode, the variable display time in high frequency support mode is overall. It is set to be shorter. When the variation display time table for non-reach corresponding to the high frequency support mode is referred to, 5 sec at a predetermined ratio (5% in the present embodiment) regardless of the number of holdings. Is set. This is a device to suppress excessive speeding up and monotonization of the game progress in the high frequency support mode, and the symbol display device 253 uses this variable display time to produce a branch effect (not compatible with reach display development), which will be described later. Will be executed.

Incidentally, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time is not limited to the above. For example, the configuration may be independent of the number of common hold number CRNs, and the variable display time may be set to be shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs is smaller. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach is not selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable display time table for generation is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same or may be the opposite of the above relationship. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between the jackpot winning time and the losing reach time. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probabilistic jackpot, the variable display time table for the normal jackpot, the variable display time table for the missed reach, and the variable display time table for the complete miss may be set individually.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after executing the variation display time setting process in step S708, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, in the type command, as game result information, 16R probability variation jackpot result information, 8R probability variation jackpot result information, 4R probability variation jackpot result information, 8R normal jackpot result information, 4R normal jackpot result information, and missed result Information etc. are included.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and the content of the determined effect. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that Further, the notification / effect control device 140 determines the details of the game effect such as the pattern variation display pattern on the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and determines them. Information is added to the fluctuation start command and the type command and transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 displays the symbol display device 253 so that the game effect (display effect) is executed in the mode determined by the notification / effect control device 140 based on the received fluctuation start command and type command. Control.

After that, in step S710, the variation display of the pattern is started on one of the upper actuating port display unit UD and the lower actuating port display unit LD of the main display unit 87, and then the variation start process is terminated. .. It is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern or the like to start before the lottery is executed.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 21), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (variation display time information) of the fluctuation display time counter provided in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 404 is "0". As described above, the value is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24). Further, this set value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the upper operating port display unit UD and the lower operating port display unit LD of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S508. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 404 is specified in any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the upper operating port display unit UD and the lower operating port display unit LD. The corresponding operation port display unit is controlled so that the stop display (confirmed display) is displayed on the corresponding one.

In the following step S509, a variable end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / effect control device 140 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form. By receiving the change end command, the display control device 410 makes a definite display (final stop display) of the final stop symbol combination in the game round.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round of 1 is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the preset stop display time (confirmed display time) has elapsed since the variation display is completed on either the operation port display unit UD or LD of the main display unit D. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not the game result of this game round (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 4R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. do. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S904. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 82 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the start processing of step S904, the open / close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the output of an external signal indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress is started to the hall computer HC in the game hall. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress depending on the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode flag.

In the following step S905, any one of "4", "8", and "16" is set in the open number counter OC provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, "16" is set in the open number counter OC, and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag or the 8R probability variation jackpot flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. When the 8R normal jackpot flag is stored, "8" is set in the open number counter OC, and when the 4R probability variation jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the flag is opened. Set "4" to the number counter OC. The open number counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 is opened. After executing the process of step S905, the process proceeds to step S506, and the opening command is set.

This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 253, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 253 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched. After executing the process of step S906, the game state transition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S908.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is open. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit of the variable winning device 82. If the big winning opening is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is "0". If the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value of the open timer counter TC is "0". The open timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the open period and the closing period (interval period) of the large winning opening, and its value is "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is executed. It is subtracted one by one. If the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the winning opening is terminated.

When the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", the opening process of the large winning opening is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit is set to the driving state in order to open the large winning opening. After that, the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) is performed. Specifically, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the open timer counter TC, and "10" is set in the winning counter PC. After executing this setting process, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 82 (large winning opening) has been opened is set, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the reception of the release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning opening of the variable winning device 82 is being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". When the value of the open timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening based on the detection signal from the ball entry detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable winning device 82. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed. The winning command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification / effect control device 140. The payout control device 242 performs a process of paying out a preset number of game balls based on the receipt of the winning command. In the notification / effect control device 140, when a prize command is given during the open / close execution mode, a process of changing the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, for example, is performed in order to teach the prize. conduct.

After executing the command output processing, after decrementing the value of the winning counter PC by 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". The opening / closing process is completed. When the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", it means that the big winning opening closing condition is satisfied. In this case, the variable winning drive unit is set to the non-driving state in order to close the large winning opening.

Subsequently, the update process of the open number counter OC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", the open number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the open number counter OC is "0", the open number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0". After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated open number counter OC is "0".

If it is determined that the value of the open number counter OC is not "0", set "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) in the open timer counter TC, set the close command, and then open / close the winning opening process. To finish. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). When the notification / effect control device 140 receives the closing command, the notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the open number counter is "0", the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S908, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the value of the open number counter OC is “0”, and the step is taken. In S910, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the open number counter OC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the open number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S911.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the open / close execution mode this time is either the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, or the 4R probability variation jackpot result. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 4R probability variation jackpot flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

When the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 8R probability variation jackpot result, and the 4R probability variation jackpot result, the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is deleted. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of opening is extended by one opening (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

On the other hand, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 8R normal jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result, that is, the 8R normal jackpot flag or the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If so, the flag related to the transition of the gaming state is cleared. After executing the erasing process, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag set in this way, in the subsequent electric service support processing, the pass / fail table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the support lottery, and the variable display time of the pattern at the time of the support lottery is displayed. It is shortened (specifically set to 2.0 sec), and the period of opening is extended by one opening (specifically set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the case of the probability variation jackpot result described above, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high frequency support mode that usually shifts after the jackpot result. Specifically, any one of "10", "20", 30 "," 50 ", and" 100 "is set in the game count counter stored in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. For the 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result, 1/10 corresponds to the number of support times "10", 1/10 corresponds to the number of times of support "20", and 1/10 corresponds to the number of times of support "20". It corresponds to "30", 2/10 corresponds to the support number "50", and 5/10 corresponds to the support number "100". The high-frequency support mode is maintained until the number of games executed after the open / close execution mode ends reaches the upper limit, and when the set upper limit is reached, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Become. In the following description, this upper limit is also referred to as the end reference number of times.

After the game state setting process is performed, the open / close execution mode end process is executed in step S912, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In this termination process, the open / close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 26, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 442 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 441 provided in the notification / effect control device 140. The MPU 442 is a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. .. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 410 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 442. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140 are transmitted to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 is a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with. It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically). Generates an internal command for VDP475). Specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game times in the symbol display device 253 based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140, and draws on the VDP 475 corresponding to the process result. Execute the process. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 472. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 253. Since the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 253.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as a symbol, a character image, and a background image displayed on the symbol display device 253. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 in the character ROM 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 253, and the display content of the symbol display device 253 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a is determined by the notification / effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and is displayed based on the result. The details of the effect are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the embodiment is determined. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

(Variation display control processing)
In the variation display control process, first, in step S1001, whether or not the game is being played, that is, the symbol display device 253 executes the symbol display (variation display, temporary stop display, or final stop display) for one game. Determine if it is. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the variation start processing is executed in step S1003, and then the variation display control process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate process is executed in step S1005. The variable mid-use process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006, the variation end process is executed in step S1006, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variable end processing, the variable display of the symbol and the effect being executed are terminated so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times (final stop display or final display). In such a process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the variation is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 253 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the variation start processing in step S1003 will be supplementarily described. The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S1101 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1101, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and variable display time. Information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

After executing the process of step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the player is in a normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the special effect mode process is executed. In the present embodiment, a normal effect mode and a special effect mode are provided as the effect modes in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The special effect mode shifts when the number of games executed in the normal effect mode reaches a preset number of times (specified number of times), and returns to the normal effect mode when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is a configured production mode. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the time-saving effect mode is set as the effect mode in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and the effect executed in the time-saving effect mode is diverted in the special effect mode. It is configured to be. Here, the processing for the special effect mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

(Processing for special production mode)
In the process for the special effect mode, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, the game count counter for the special effect mode provided in the game count counter area 462 of the RAM 444 is updated. The game count counter for the special effect mode is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed in the normal effect mode.

After executing the update process in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the normal effect mode has reached a preset number of times (prescribed number of times) with reference to the value of the game count counter for the special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the processing for this special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, the transition process to the special effect mode is performed. Specifically, a process of switching the light emitting body mode of the lamp unit 26 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed, and a process of switching the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 to one corresponding to the special effect mode is performed. Then, a special effect mode start command is output to the display control device 410 in order to switch the display mode of the background on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 and the variation display mode of the symbol to the mode corresponding to the special effect mode. After that, in step S1205, the special effect mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, and the process for the special effect mode ends. By setting the special effect mode flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 thereafter.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if an affirmative determination is made in the step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, the number of times the pseudo-variation (unit effect) described later is executed is the lower limit of the end reference number of times that can be set in the high-frequency support mode with reference to the pseudo-variation count counter provided in the RAM 444 (the present implementation). In the form, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 times). If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the processing for this special effect mode is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the continuous lottery process of the special effect mode is executed. That is, when the number of unit effects executed in the special effect mode reaches the above lower limit value, whether or not the special effect mode can be continued is determined by lottery.

If a continuation result is obtained in the lottery process of step S1207, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208, and the process for the special effect mode is terminated as it is. If the lottery process in step S1207 results in a discontinuity, a negative determination is made in step S1208, and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the special effect mode end flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. When this special effect mode end flag is set, the effect mode is switched from the special effect mode to the normal effect mode at the end of the current game round.

After that, in step S1210, the resetting process for the specified number of times is executed, and then the process for the special effect mode is terminated. A plurality of candidates are provided for the specified number of times, and in the resetting process, one of the candidates is selected by lottery. With such a configuration, the span from the end of the special effect mode to the transition to the next special effect mode is diversified.

Returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 28 again, after executing the special effect mode process of step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, the effect determination process for the normal effect mode is executed based on the information grasped in step S1101.

Specifically, when the game result of the game times to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the big hit result (that is, a probabilistic big hit result or a normal big hit result), the effect setting process for the big hit is executed. In the effect setting process for the jackpot, the final stop result of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, when the result is a probability variation jackpot result, the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is combined or a non-specific symbol (even number is attached) on one effective line L1 to L5. The stop result in which the combination of the main symbol) is displayed as the final stop is determined as the stop result of this game. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is finally stopped and displayed on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed in this game. Determined as the final stop result.

The type of the main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 to be finally stopped and displayed when the big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop provided in the RAM 444. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. Also in the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 444.

Further, in the effect setting process for the big hit, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big hit is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display or the like. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

If the game result is not a jackpot result and a reach occurs, the effect setting process for the reach generation (out-of-reach) corresponding to the out-of-result result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Regarding the former, the explanation is used because it is the same as the processing when it is a big hit result. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the final stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the final stop result in which the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of the out-of-reach symbol combination and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is neither a jackpot result nor a miss result corresponding to the reach display, that is, if it is a complete miss result, the outline of the effect for complete miss and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

After executing the determination process of step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1108, and a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 in order to execute the effect in the current game round based on these various commands.

After the process of step S1108 is executed, in the following step S1109, the process of starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the process for starting the variation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in step S1105, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of a variation display mode of the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) in the normal effect mode based on FIG. 29. FIG. 30 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and FIG. 30 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. In FIG. 30B, for convenience of explanation, the background image, the hold information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted.

(Variable display mode in normal staging mode)
As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the variable display mode of the symbol executed on the display screen 253a is completely off, and has five major modes: normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Be separated. Each of these variable display modes is set so that the variable display time is different, and an outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. It is possible.

Specifically, the variable display time of complete deviation is "1 sec to 17 sec" (difference is set according to the number of holds), the variable display time of normal reach A is "18 sec", and the variable display time of normal reach B is. Is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A "20 sec or 22 sec", and the fluctuation display time of super reach A is "22 sec or 24 sec" which is the same as or longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach B, and the fluctuation of super reach B. The display time is "24 sec or 26 sec" which is the same as or longer than the variable display time of Super Reach A, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is "26 sec or 28 sec" which is longer than the variable display time of other Super Reach B. It has become. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "22 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B or the super reach A should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140. , Which reach display will be selected.

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, Super Reach C> Super Reach B
＞ Super Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ It is easier to select in the order of Normal Reach A, and in the game times corresponding to the off result, it is completely off ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach B ＞
The configuration is such that it is easy to select in the order of Super Reach C. In other words, the higher the variable display time, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped). Display), and end (stop display) the variable display of the symbol in the lower symbol column Z3. In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same number attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13A) are stopped and displayed. A reach line is formed at. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the symbol column Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the symbol combination displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined fixed display time (final stop time). That is, the current game round continues until the confirmed display time elapses, and the transition to the next game round is permitted after the confirmed display time elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. , How to set the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the variation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the variation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B, and C will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 30 (b2) to 30 (b4), the above-mentioned reach lines are formed for the super reach A, B, and C through the same process as the normal reach A, B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol row Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

(Pseudo continuous fluctuation display)
In the normal effect mode in the present embodiment, there is a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of shifting to the reach display in both the game times corresponding to the reach display and the game times not corresponding to the reach display. May be executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 (a) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 31 (b) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestion effect is executed. As for FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the background image, the hold information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are not shown in the same manner as in FIG. 30 (b).

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), at the start timing of the game round, the variable display of each symbol string that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a is started. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variable display, the variable display speed of the symbols decreases, and each symbol column is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. When the current game times do not correspond to the above-mentioned suggestion effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the game result is clearly shown to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31 (a), since the game result is a complete deviation result, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line.

FIG. 31B exemplifies the game times corresponding to the suggestion effect and the reach display. At the start timing of the game round, the variable display of each symbol sequence that has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a is started. After that, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols decreases, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. When the lower symbol row is stopped, the symbol that can form the reach line together with the stopped upper symbol in the lower symbol row is shifted from the upper symbol so that the reach line is not formed with the symbol of the upper symbol row. Stop at the position. After that, when the middle symbol row is stopped and all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display, pause display), the symbol combination (re-variable symbol combination or revariable symbol combination) corresponding to the above suggestion is displayed at the effective position of the display screen 253a. , Temporary stop symbol combination) is formed.

After that, all the symbols that have been stopped once resume the fluctuation with a specific sound effect and an effect such as a flash. In other words, it looks as if one game round has ended, and in reality, the temporary stop → re-variation is performed under the situation where the game round is continued. That is, it is a suggestion effect in the present embodiment to display the symbol combination corresponding to the re-variation from the temporary stop display to the re-variation display before the final stop display, and in the following description, the display is referred to as "pseudo continuous variation display". Also called.

The pseudo-continuous variation display may be continuously (repeatedly) executed a plurality of times during one game. During the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, even if all the symbol rows are stopped, the symbol variation display continues for the operation port display units UD and LD of the main display unit 87 that correspond to the current game times. Will be done.

After the variation display is restarted, the timing of the final stop display (confirmed display) is set, so that the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is stopped displayed on the valid line (final stop display), and the game result is displayed by the player. It is specified in. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, since the game result is the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (final stop display) on the effective line.

As described above, the pseudo-continuous variation display in the present embodiment occurs not only in the game times corresponding to the reach display but also in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation result. Even if the symbol combination does not shift to the reach display or the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop, the attention to the stopped symbol combination is stopped by the lower symbol row and the middle symbol row by leaving room for the jackpot. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a sudden drop in the case of a drop.

Regarding the table that determines whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is possible, the pseudo continuous fluctuation display occurs in the game times corresponding to the jackpot results as compared with the game times corresponding to the reach loss result and the game times corresponding to the complete loss result. It is configured to be easy, and in the game times corresponding to the reach loss result, the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is more likely to occur than in the game times corresponding to the complete loss result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow in the case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation display is repeated during one game round will be supplementarily described. FIG. 32 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect and the jackpot expectation. In FIG. 32 (a), in order to facilitate the comparison, the game times that do not support the pseudo continuous fluctuation display are illustrated in ta1 to ta2, and the game times that support the pseudo continuous fluctuation display are shown in ta3 to ta9, respectively. Illustrate.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), at the timing of ta1 when the game rounds that do not support the pseudo continuous variation display are started, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 87, and the variation display of the pattern is started accordingly. The variable display of the symbol is started on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. At the timing of ta2 when the predetermined variation display time has elapsed since the variation display of the pattern and the symbol started, the pattern that was variablely displayed on the display unit for the operation port becomes the pattern corresponding to the game result of this time. Each symbol that has been stopped and displayed and has been variablely displayed on the display screen 253a is stopped and displayed so as to be a symbol combination corresponding to the current game result. That is, the start / end timing of the fluctuation is synchronized (matched) between the operation port display unit and the display screen 253a.

At the timing of ta3 when the game round corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation display starts, the variation display of the pattern is started on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87, and the symbol is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 accordingly. Fluctuation display has started. After the variation display is started at the timing of ta3, the re-variation symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a at the timing of ta4 when a predetermined period has elapsed.

At the timing of ta5 where the temporary stop time has elapsed from the timing of ta4, the variable display of each symbol column that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. At this time, it is suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the reach display by adding a white effect along the outer circumference of the display screen 253a. During this period, the variable display of the design continues on the operating port display unit of the main display unit 87, and the variable display of the design on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the design on the operating port display unit are asynchronous.

At the timing of ta6 when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variation display was restarted, the re-variation symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed again on the effective line of the display screen 253a. At the timing of ta7 when the temporary stop time has elapsed from the timing of ta6, the variable display of each symbol column that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. At this time, the color of the white effect displayed on the display screen 253a is changed from white to blue. The details will be described later, but it is suggested that the possibility of shifting to the reach display has increased due to the repetition of the pseudo continuous fluctuation display (the effect color changes (steps up)). During this period, the variable display of the design continues on the operating port display unit, and the variable display of the design on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the design on the operating port display unit are asynchronous.

At the timing of ta8 after the timing of ta7 when the fluctuation display of the symbol is restarted, that is, the transition timing to the reach display, the upper symbol row and the lower symbol are stopped and displayed, and only the middle symbol row continues the fluctuation display. It becomes a state. In the example shown in FIG. 32 (a), the game result of this time corresponds to the off result. Therefore, after shifting to the reach display, in detail, at the timing of ta9 where the variable display time has elapsed from the timing of ta3, the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the actuation port, and is disengaged on the display screen 253a. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is displayed as the final stop. After that, the game moves to the next game at the timing of ta10 when the confirmed display time has elapsed.

In the above-mentioned example, the case where the pseudo-continuous variation display is repeated twice during one game round is illustrated, but the number of times of the pseudo-continuous variation display repeated during one game round has a certain range (in the present embodiment). 1 to 6 times) is set. Regarding the table that determines the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays set in comparison with the game times corresponding to the reach loss result and the game times corresponding to the complete loss result in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the reach loss result, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays set is likely to be larger than in the game times corresponding to the complete loss result. .. As the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays increases, the expectation of a jackpot increases, so it is assumed that the player who expects a jackpot expects a large number of pseudo continuous fluctuation displays to continue. In this embodiment, the number of consecutive pseudo-continuous variation displays is shown with the variation display executed after the first temporary stop as the first time.

In the present embodiment, the color of the effect of the display screen 253a changes every time the pseudo continuous fluctuation display continues, suggesting the degree of expectation of shifting to the reach display. Even if the player overlooks a part of the pseudo continuous display, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of shifting from the effect color to the reach display.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the effect displayed during the pseudo continuous display changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow as the number of consecutive pseudo continuous fluctuation displays increases. The expectation of shifting to reach display in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow, in other words, the expectation of a big hit result is set to be high. Of these colors, the transition to super reach is confirmed for green to rainbow (4 to 6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display), and the jackpot is particularly confirmed for rainbow (6 consecutive times of pseudo continuous fluctuation display). do.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects the pseudo-continuous display to occur during the game round and to continue if the pseudo-continuous variation display occurs. By diversifying the production of parts other than the reach display in the game times executed in the normal production mode, the degree of attention to the game is improved.

Returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 28, if a negative determination is made in step S1102 of the variation start process, that is, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, the effect determination process for the high frequency support mode is executed. After executing the effect determination process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determination content, the game rotation effect start process is executed in step S1109, and then this variation. Ends the start process.

In the effect determination process of step S1107, if the game result of the current game is a jackpot result (that is, a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed. In the effect setting process for the jackpot, the final stop result of the symbol for the jackpot is determined (the final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, when the result is a probability variation jackpot result, a combination of the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) or a combination of non-specific symbols (main symbol with an even number) on the effective line is used. The stop result displayed as the final stop is determined as the stop result of this game. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line is determined as the stop result of this game. ..

Further, in the effect setting process for the big hit, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big hit is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display or the like. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. Determine the effect pattern of the reach display corresponding to the result. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If the game result corresponds to the missed reach, the effect setting process for generating the reach corresponding to the missed result is executed. In this effect setting process, the outline of the effect and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Regarding the former, the explanation is used because it is the same as the processing when it is a big hit result. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is established on the effective line is determined as the stop result of this time. Further, in this determination, the stop result on the effective line is determined so that the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is finally stopped at the stop position shifted in front of or behind the reach line. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is neither a jackpot result nor a miss result corresponding to the reach display, that is, if it is a complete miss result, the outline of the effect for complete miss and the symbol combination to be finally stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

As described above, during the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route are guided to the lower operating port 83b by the electric accessory 91. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation result is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode (see FIGS. 24 (b) and 24 (c)). In this way, by changing the progress speed of the game, the sharpness of the game is strengthened.

During the above-mentioned normal effect mode, almost the entire area of the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set as the variable display area ME of the symbol. On the other hand, during the effect mode (time saving effect mode) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 33 (a), the upper right area (reduced display area) of the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. The symbol is reduced and displayed in SE), and the variable display / stop display of the symbol is performed in the upper right area. The girl character CP1 is displayed in the vacant area (the central portion of the display screen 253a) by reducing and displaying the symbol, and this character CP1 performs a predetermined action (movement) according to the progress of the game. In this way, by significantly changing the display mode from the low-frequency support mode, the normal effect mode in the low-frequency support mode and the time-saving effect mode in the high-frequency support mode are differentiated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 (b) and 34, the flow of the effect in the high frequency support mode will be described. FIG. 33B is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display effect. In addition, in FIG. 33 (b), the case where the game round corresponding to the disengagement result is started at each timing of tb1, tb3, tb5, tb7 is illustrated.

In the example shown in FIG. 33 (b), at the timing of tb1 in the high frequency support mode, the variable display of the symbol stopped and displayed in the reduced display area SE of the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a) is started. There is. Regarding the girl character CP1 displayed in the lower right part (initial position) of the display screen 253a, the movement is started by crossing the display screen 253a from the right side to the left side in accordance with the start of the variable display of the symbol (the movement is started). See FIG. 34 (a1)). In the present embodiment, the girl character CP1 is configured to shift to the reach display after catching the fairy character CP2, but the girl character CP1 searches for the fairy character CP2 during the variable display of the symbol. The moving image is displayed.

At the timing of tb2, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the reduced display area SE. The character CP1 returns to the initial position (lower right portion of the display screen 253a) from the timing of tb2 to the timing of tb3 where the fixed display time has elapsed.

A series of actions of the character CP1 displayed between the timings of tb1 and tb2 are stored in the character ROM 476 of the display control device 410 as effect data. The timings of tb3 to tb4 and the timings of tb5 to tb6 are all game times corresponding to complete deviation, and the same effect (search effect) as the timing of tb1 to tb2 is repeated using the above effect data. It will be.

At the timing of tb7 after the timing of tb6, the game round corresponding to the off-reach is started. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, the variable display of the symbol in the reduced display area SE and the moving image display of the character in the variable display area ME are started at the timing of tb6. At the timing of tb8 where a predetermined time (for example, the same time as the variable display time shown in the timings of tb1 to tb2) has elapsed from the timing of tb7, a branching effect (capture) indicating that there is a possibility of shifting to the reach display is possible. Production) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen, and in the branching effect, the girl character CP1 and the fairy character CP2 are chased on the display screen 253a. It will be displayed. It is clearly indicated whether or not the girl character CP1 shifts to the reach display depending on whether or not the fairy character CP2 can be caught through the chase. In the game times that support reach display, the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2 in the branch effect (success display), and in the game times that do not support reach display, the girl character CP1 is the fairy in the branch effect. A display (failure display) is made in which the character CP2 of is missed.

In the example shown in FIG. 33 (b), the success display is made at the timing of tb9, and the process shifts to the reach display. At the timing of tb9, the stage is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the scoreboard is displayed above the stage. Then, the girl character CP1 that had been waiting (stopped) at the corner of the display screen 253a moves toward the stage, and after reaching the stage, a singing effect of singing a song is executed (for example, FIG. 34 (b). )reference).

When the singing effect is completed, the numbers variably displayed on the scoreboard are stopped and displayed, and the result of the success or failure of this game is notified by the numbers (scores) that are stopped and displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, "100 points" is displayed on the scoreboard and the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row is displayed. It stops, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is displayed as the final stop. On the other hand, if the game times this time correspond to the out-of-game result, "0 points" is displayed on the scoreboard, and at the same time, the middle symbol column, which has been continuously displayed in a variable manner, stops, and the out-of-game result. The symbol combination corresponding to is displayed as the final stop. In this way, the timing at which the symbol is stopped and displayed after the reach effect is synchronized with the timing at which the variable display of the symbol on the operating port display unit of the main display unit 87 ends.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, 5 sec may be set as the variable display time in a part of the game times corresponding to the complete deviation (see FIG. 24). The sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (1 sec) coincides with the execution time (6 sec) of the branch effect in the game times corresponding to the reach display. In the game times corresponding to the complete deviation, after the failure display is executed in the branch effect, the game times are ended without shifting to the reach display.

As already explained, the high-frequency support mode is roughly divided into one that shifts after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result and one that shifts after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Regarding the latter, in particular, when the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches a preset end reference number, the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The above-mentioned time saving effect mode will also be terminated with the transition to the low frequency support mode. At the time of this transition, an effect corresponding to the end of the time saving effect mode (end suggestion effect) is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (a2), the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display to the final display in the game times related to the end of the time saving effect mode. Then, at the end of the final display, the darkening is canceled, the reduced display of the symbol is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal effect mode. The end suggestion effect is configured so that it can occur even in the game times other than the game times related to the end of the time saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the final display, the display of the time saving effect mode is continued after the darkening is canceled when the final display ends (FIG. 34 (a2)). → See (a1)).

During the time saving effect mode, the effect (notice effect) suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 has a predetermined probability before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be executed in. The effect corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been the target of the lottery is executed at the timing before the game times related to the hold information, so that the player can hold the game corresponding to the game times currently in progress. In addition to the game of confirming the lottery result of information, the game of confirming or predicting the result when the reserved information to be the lottery later becomes the lottery target is added according to the content of the above-mentioned production, and the game is diversified. Is planned. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, in order to enable such a notice effect, information such as whether or not the jackpot result is supported before the game round related to the stored hold information is started is displayed. It is configured to be specified first. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 36, various processes for the advance notice effect executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, specifically, a hold executed as a part of the information acquisition process (see FIG. 19). A supplementary explanation will be given to the confirmation process for advance notice and the hold command setting process.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the confirmation process for holding notice, in step S1301, the operation holding storage number N and the common holding number CRN stored in the holding number storage area of the holding ball storage area 432 are read out, and the holding is performed. The number information is stored in the register of MPU402. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by this winning is included in the information of the big hit winning. Specifically, first, in step S1302, among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the value of the acquired hit random number counter C1. To grasp.

In the following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the hit / fail table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15 (a)) and the information for jackpot determination (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 are referred to. Then, specify whether the information is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot winning. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and the hit / fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15 (b)) and the information for jackpot determination (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302. To identify whether the information is included in the information set as a jackpot win.

After executing each process of step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. If the jackpot determination information (value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to the jackpot winning, a positive determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1307. After the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1307, the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize, that is, the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referred to. And determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1407 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the jackpot determination information (value of the winning random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 does not correspond to the jackpot winning, a negative determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, out of the reserved information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 83a and 83b, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1309, the reach grasped in step S1308 is referred to by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403. It is specified whether the information for determination (value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, in step S1311, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and then the confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Pending command setting process)
Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described with reference to FIG. 36. In the hold command setting process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. Determine if the information is identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the jackpot correspondence hold command is set. It should be noted that the setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing the command information in the command setting area provided in the RAM 404. The jackpot support hold command includes information on the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S1403 and whether or not the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. By determining, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation process for the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 35). If the reach occurrence information is stored, the off-reach correspondence hold command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete off-off correspondence hold command is set in step S1405.

When setting the hold command in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS, and the information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. .. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140, and the notification / effect control device 140 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. As described above, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game round related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the hold command for complete disconnection, the variable display time is temporarily set.

The notification / effect control device 140 determines whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the hold command received from the main control device 162 and the lottery table for the advance notice effect. The lottery table for the notice effect is set to be higher in the order of the hold command corresponding to the complete loss result <the hold command corresponding to the reach loss result <the hold command corresponding to the jackpot result. As for the types of effects in the preview effect, 6 patterns of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow are provided as in the above-mentioned pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and the expectation of a big hit result is white <blue. It is set to increase in the order of <yellow <green <red <rainbow. Of the effect colors in the preview effect, green to rainbow correspond to reach display, and the point that rainbow corresponds to big hit is the same as pseudo continuous fluctuation display, and it is confirmed that reach display will occur. If you don't, the effect won't be green or above, and if you're not sure it's going to be a big hit, the effect won't be a rainbow.

If a hold command is received while the effect has not occurred, it is determined whether or not to generate the effect in the game times before the game times related to the hold command, and the effect is generated. When a hold command is received under such circumstances, it is determined whether or not to rank up the color of the effect in the game times before the game times related to the hold command. The effect once generated is deleted by either the mode transition effect or the reach effect described above.

In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, the effect display is completed during one game round, whereas in the advance staging, the effect display is continued so as to straddle a plurality of game rounds. It differs in that. Further, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation display, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations and the color of the effect are matched, but in the advance notice effect, the number of game times digested during the advance notice effect and the color of the effect do not always match. .. That is, in the advance notice production, the color of the effect may not change (step up) even if the game times progress.

Here, the outline of the advance notice effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 37 (a). In FIG. 37 (a), there are two hold information reserved after the game being executed, and the second hold information (hold information corresponding to the jackpot result) is used as an opportunity to start the advance notice effect. The case is illustrated.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the advance notice effect is started with the hold information (hit result) two times later as a trigger. In this advance notice effect, a white effect along the outer circumference of the display screen 253a is added to the display screen 253a. This effect will be carried over to the next game.

When the game moves to the next game and the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the color of the effect is changed from white to blue. This suggests that the possibility of reach display (big hit) has increased. This effect will be carried over to the next game (that is, the corresponding game that triggered the hold notice). The corresponding game times correspond to the reach display, and the effect being displayed will be deleted at the end of the main game times (reach display).

In the present embodiment, the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the high frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the low frequency support mode, and the game progress can be speeded up. It is planned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), in the low frequency support mode, 18 sec to 28 sec is set as the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, whereas in the high frequency support mode. The variable display time corresponding to the reach display is unified to 17 sec. The reach display executed in the high frequency support mode is configured to be all the above-mentioned super reach D.

Here, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the effect mode becomes the above-mentioned special effect mode, so that the main effect including the reach display becomes the same as the time-saving effect mode. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the time saving effect mode is occurring during the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, and in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. It suppresses the monotony of the game.

However, since the special effect mode is an effect mode that is executed only during the low frequency support mode, even if the same effect (super reach D) as the special effect mode is executed, the variable display time is adjusted accordingly. Is not shortened. That is, even when the fluctuation display time corresponding to any of the normal reach A, the normal reach B, the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach C is set in the main control device 162, the notification / effect control device 140 Is configured to execute Super Reach D instead of these various reach based on the effect mode being the special effect mode. In this case, there will be a difference in the variable display time between the super reach D executed in the high frequency support mode and the super reach D executed in the special effect mode. One of the features is that by making good use of the part where the difference occurs, the flow of the production in the special production mode is brought closer to the flow of the production in the time-saving production mode. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the special effect mode will be described.

First, returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 28, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1104 of the variation start process, that is, when the special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, the step. Proceed to S1106. In step S1106, the effect determination process for the special effect mode is executed. After executing the effect determination process in step S1106, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the determined content in step S1108, and after executing the game rotation effect start process in step S1109, this variation start is used. End the process. Here, the effect determination process for the special effect mode will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39.

(Production determination process for special production mode)
As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the effect determination process for the special effect mode, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result (that is, the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current game round is out of reach and corresponds to the reach. If an affirmative determination is made in either step S1501 or step S1502, the special effect setting process for reach is executed in step S1503. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in both steps S1501 and S1502, that is, when the current game round corresponds to complete deviation, the special effect setting process for complete deviation is executed in step S1504.

(Special effect setting process for reach)
As shown in FIG. 38 (b), in the special effect setting process for reach, first, in step S1511, the time from the start of fluctuation to the transition to the reach display is specified. As described above, the reach display is unified to Super Reach D in the special effect mode. That is, the super reach D is executed regardless of which of 18 sec to 28 sec is specified as the fluctuation display time by the main control device 162 (see FIG. 37 (b)). In the present embodiment, the execution time of the reach display in the super reach D is specified to be 10 sec, and the game shifts to the reach display by subtracting the execution time of the super reach D from the variable display time in the main game. The time required to do this will be specified.

In the following step S1512, the value obtained by dividing the time required for shifting to the reach display by the reference time, that is, the number of divisions obtained by dividing the section before the reach display in the game times by the reference time (each divided section in the following description). Is also called a "part"). Here, the reference time will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 24 (c). As described above, in the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched on the right route enter the lower operating port 83b with the support of the electric accessory 91. Therefore, in the situation where the game ball is continuously fired to the right route during the high frequency support mode, the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 83b changes from "2" to "4", and most of the games are played. The variable display time is 1 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec for each time. That is, the time required for one game is 2 sec in many cases.

The character ROM 476 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores an effect (a moving image in which the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a) having a playback time of 2 sec. The effect is repeatedly reproduced. This time is the above reference time. In the following description, the above-mentioned moving image and the variable display-stop display (including both the temporary stop display and the confirmed display) of the symbol performed in parallel with the moving image are referred to as "first special effect". At the time of the temporary stop display in the special effect mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation is displayed in order to resemble the time saving effect mode. By the way, in the special effect mode, a configuration is realized in which the game times appear to be progressing one after another in a pseudo manner by using the first special effect, etc., but the individual fluctuations are referred to as "pseudo fluctuations" or "units". Also called "display".

For example, when the variable display time is 18 sec, the time required for reach display is 8 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "4". When the variable display time is 20 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 10 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "5". When the variable display time is 22 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 12 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "6". When the variable display time is 24 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 14 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "7". When the variable display time is 26 sec, the time until the reach display is 16 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "8". When the variable display time is 28 sec, the time required to reach the reach display is 18 sec, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 sec), the number of divisions is "9".

In the following step S1513, the upper limit (consecutive number of times) at which the first special effect can be continuously executed in the section before the transition to the reach display is referred to the continuous number setting table stored in the ROM 443 and the random number for lottery. And set. Specifically, the first continuous number of times and the second continuous number of times that enable the first special effect to be continuously executed are set.

The first and second consecutive times in the present embodiment both indicate the number of times that the first special effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second special effect and the third special effect described later. Yes, for example, when the first special effect is executed once, the first consecutive number of times = "1", and when the first special effect is executed twice in succession, the second consecutive number of times = "2". .. On the other hand, the number of consecutive variations displayed until the end of the second special effect or the third special effect is referred to as "continuous variation number" with the first special effect set to "0", and is distinguished from the number of consecutive times. For example, if the first special effect is executed once, the number of continuous fluctuations = "0", if the first special effect is executed twice in succession, the number of continuous fluctuations = "1", the first special effect When the second special effect is executed after is executed twice in succession, the number of continuous fluctuations = "2". Incidentally, in each figure such as FIGS. 40 and 41 referred to in the following description, the number of continuous fluctuations in each part is represented by a numerical value.

When the game round corresponds to the missed reach, the continuous number setting table for the missed reach stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. "1" to "5" are provided as the first consecutive number of times in the continuous number setting table for the out-of-reach, and any one of these five candidates is set as the first consecutive number of times in the main game.

When the game times correspond to the hit reach, the continuous number setting table for the hit reach stored in the ROM 443 is referred to. "1" to "6" are provided as the first consecutive number in the hit reach continuous number setting table, and any one of these six candidates is set as the first consecutive number in the main game.

In the continuous number setting table for out-of-reach, the selection rate increases in the order of "5" <"4" <"3", "2", "1", and in the continuous number setting table for winning reach, "1" <" It is configured so that the selection probability increases in the order of 2 ”<“ 3 ”<“ 6 ”<“ 5 ”<“ 4 ”. Therefore, the higher the number of consecutive times, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The number of consecutive times "6" corresponds to a big hit, and when the number of consecutive times becomes "6", that is, when the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect becomes "6", that time point It becomes clear that the jackpot has been confirmed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the number of continuous fluctuations becomes "6", the effect described later becomes rainbow color.

The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the first special effect group may be divided back and forth by interposing the second special effect in the section before the reach display. Regarding the second consecutive number of times, for example, the upper limit of the continuous number of times of the first special effect in the first half portion thus divided is defined. For the second consecutive number of times, "3" is set with the following exceptions.

As a condition when a value other than "3" is set as the second consecutive number of times, there is a case where the jackpot is supported and the first consecutive number of times is "5" or more. In such a case, the number of second consecutive times may be increased to be the same as the number of first consecutive times. When the number of consecutive times is increased from "3" to "4" to "6", an event may occur in which the number of consecutive times reaches, for example, "4" but does not develop into super reach. Functions as a definite effect that is confirmed to be a big hit immediately after that.

In the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140, the number of times (continuous result) of the first special effect executed before the start of the game round (for example, in the immediately preceding game round), specifically, another effect is inserted in between. A continuous counter is provided to store the number of times (continuous result) that the first special effect is repeated without any problem. The continuous counter is incremented by "1" each time the first special effect is executed, and is "0" when an effect other than the first special effect (for example, the second special effect or the third special effect described later) is executed. It is configured to be cleared. For example, when the first special effect is continuous over a plurality of game times executed before the game, that is, when the first special effect is repeated without any other special effect intervening between them. Even so, the continuous result counter is added each time the first special effect is performed. In the following step S1514, the continuous result is specified with reference to this continuous counter.

After that, in step S1515, the pattern setting process for reach effect (pattern setting process for reach effect) is executed, and then the setting process for special effect is terminated. Here, the reach effect pattern setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

(Pattern setting process for reach production)
In the reach effect pattern setting process, first, in step S1601, the section (divided part) before the reach display in the game times is divided into two sections. Specifically, when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode, it goes through the branch effect (hereinafter, also referred to as the second special effect) as in the time saving effect mode. The execution time of the second special effect (6 sec in the present embodiment) is an integral multiple of the above part (reference time). Therefore, the plurality of parts before the super reach D are used for the second special effect, and the section before the reach display is the first half section (first section) for the first special effect and the second half section for the branch effect (second section). Section) and. Incidentally, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the second special effect from the section before the reach display is the time during which the first special effect can be executed in the first half section.

After dividing into the first half section / the second half section in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the number of parts constituting the first half section is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (first consecutive number of times) set in step S1513. The details will be described later, but if the first special effect is applied to all the parts constituting the first half section and the number of consecutive times exceeds the first number of consecutive times, the flow of the effect tends to be uncomfortable. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the number of consecutive times exceeds at least the first number of consecutive times, a second special effect is arranged in any of the above parts in order to prevent the first special effect from being continuous so as to exceed the number of first consecutive times. The production pattern is determined in this way. For example, the first special effect group is divided back and forth by interposing a second special effect between a plurality of consecutive first special effects.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, referring to the value of the continuous counter, it is determined whether or not the continuous result from the previous game round is "0", that is, whether or not the previous game round has ended except for the first special effect. judge.

When the value of the continuous counter is "0", in step S1604, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game time is performed without considering the flow from the previous game time. decide. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores the first special pattern table according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the like, and the first special pattern table is stored in step S1604. In the process, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the first special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected first special pattern table. The first special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to a jackpot result and a table group corresponding to a missed result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive effects is easier to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to increase.

For example, when the number of game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the number of first consecutive times is "6", the number of second consecutive times is "2", and the number of parts in the first half section is "6", it is in the first special pattern table group. Select the one that corresponds to those conditions from. The first special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A1, B1, C1, and D1 (see FIG. 40 (a)).

The effect pattern A1 has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to all the parts of the first to sixth parts, and the intervention of the second special effect between the continuous first special effects is avoided. To. When the game times are executed in this effect pattern A1, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, the first special effect is repeated 6 times before the transition to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33 (a)) to reach a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec). Along with this, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed 6 times, and the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect executed in the 2nd section is 6 times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern B1 has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to the first part, the second special effect is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special effect is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special production group is divided into front and back by the second special production. In this effect pattern B1, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, after the first special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, the second special effect is executed until the process shifts to the second section. The first special effect is repeated twice. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33 (a)) to reach a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec). The number of continuous fluctuations is 2 when the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed twice immediately before the second section, and then the second special effect executed in the second section is included. It will be times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern C1 has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to the first part to the second part, the second special effect is applied to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special effect is applied to the sixth part. The production group is divided into front and back by the second special production. The effect pattern D1 is configured to apply the second special effect to the first to third parts and the first special effect to the fourth to sixth parts, and after the second special effect is executed at the beginning. The first special production is continuous.

In the first special pattern table corresponding to the hit result described in detail above, the number of times that the first special effect is continuous before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern C1 <effect pattern B1 <effect pattern D1 <effect pattern A1. The selection rate of each effect pattern also increases in the order of effect pattern C1 <effect pattern B1 <effect pattern D1 <effect pattern A1.

In the table group corresponding to the deviation result, a difference in the selection rate is provided so that the effect pattern having a large number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display is more easily selected than the effect pattern having a small number of consecutive times. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to decrease.

In this way, one game is divided into a plurality of games in a pseudo manner to make it appear as if the game is progressing at a short pitch, giving the player the impression that the time-saving production mode has been set. Can be given.

Returning to the description of step S1603 of FIG. 39, when a negative determination is made in the step S1603, and when the previous game round has ended in the first special effect (when the value of the continuous counter is not 0), In step S1605, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 has a second special pattern table according to various conditions such as a winning lottery result, an upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and continuous results from the previous game times. Is stored, and in the process of step S1604, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the second special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected second special pattern table.

Like the first special effect pattern table, the second special effect pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the missed result. For any of the table groups, the intervention location of the second special effect is defined so that the number of consecutive games does not exceed the above upper limit (the first number of consecutive games) when the previous game times are taken into consideration.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive effects is easier to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to increase.

For example, the number of games corresponding to the jackpot result, the number of consecutive games is "6", the number of consecutive games is "6", the number of parts in the first half section is "6", and the number of consecutive games from the previous game is "1". In the case of, the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is referred to (see FIG. 40 (b)). The second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A2, B2, and C2.

The effect pattern A2 is configured to apply the second special effect to the first part to the third part and the first special effect to the fourth part to the sixth part, respectively, and the second special effect is executed at the beginning. Later, the first special production continues. When the game times are executed in this effect pattern A2, as shown in Example 1 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the previous game times are performed by executing the second special effect at the beginning of the first section. The continuation from is interrupted before the above upper limit is reached. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated three times while the second special effect is completed and the process shifts to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33 (a)) to reach a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec). Along with this, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times including the second special effect executed in the second section is three times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern B2 has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to the first part, the second special effect is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special effect is applied to the fifth to sixth parts. The special production group is divided into front and back by the second special production. When the effect pattern B2 is executed as the effect pattern, as shown in Example 2 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the second special effect is performed after the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the first section. Will be executed. Due to this second special effect, the continuation from the previous game round is interrupted before the above upper limit is reached. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated twice while the second special effect is completed and the process shifts to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33 (a)) to reach a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec). Along with this, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed twice, and the number of consecutive times including the second special effect executed in the second section is two times. Then, the super reach D is executed through the second special effect.

The effect pattern C2 has a configuration in which the first special effect is applied to the first part to the second part, the second special effect is applied to the third part to the fifth part, and the first special effect is applied to the sixth part. The production group is divided into front and back by the second special production. At the beginning of the first section, the first special effect is executed twice, and then the second special effect is executed. Therefore, the number of consecutive games from the previous game is 4 times in the second special effect. Originally, four times in a row correspond to the development to the super reach D, but in the effect pattern C2, the first special effect is executed again after the second special effect, and the process does not develop to the super reach D. This effect pattern C2 is one of the above-mentioned contradiction effects.

In the second special pattern table corresponding to the hit result described in detail above, the number of times that the first special effect is continuous before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern B1 <effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern. Also, the order of effect pattern B1 <effect pattern A1 is higher. On the other hand, in the second special pattern table corresponding to the deviation result, the number of times that the first special effect is consecutive before the reach display is configured to be smaller than that of the second special pattern table corresponding to the hit result. The selection rate at which the effect pattern C2 is selected is lower than the selection rate of the effect pattern A2 and the effect pattern B2.

In the table group corresponding to the deviation result, a difference in the selection rate is provided so that the effect pattern having a large number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display is more easily selected than the effect pattern having a small number of consecutive times. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to decrease.

In this way, one game is divided into a plurality of games in a pseudo manner so that the game appears to be progressing at a short pitch, giving the player the impression that the time-saving production mode has been set. Can be given.

Returning to the description of step S1602 of FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, that is, if the number of parts in the first half section is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the continuous result from the previous game round is 0, that is, whether or not the previous game round has ended except for the first special effect, with reference to the value of the continuous counter. do.

When the value of the continuous counter is 0, in step S1607, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game is determined without considering the flow from the previous game. .. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores a third special pattern table according to various conditions such as a winning lottery result, an upper limit number, and the number of parts in the first half section, and the third special pattern table is stored in step S1607. In the process, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the third special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected third special pattern table. The third special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the missed result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive effects is easier to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to increase.

In the table group corresponding to the deviation result, a difference in the selection rate is provided so that the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display is more easily selected than the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive times. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to decrease.

The basic configuration of the third special pattern table is the same as that of the first special pattern table, but there are many effect patterns for the effect pattern in which the number of consecutive times of the first special effect executed before the reach display transition is small. The bias of the selectivity of is increasing. In the game times in which the third special pattern table is referred to, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller than in the game times in which the first special pattern table is referred to. By increasing the bias of the selectivity as described above, even when the number of parts in the first half section is small, the number of consecutive times and the number of continuous fluctuations before the reach display can be obtained.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, when a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, when the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the continuous counter is not 0), step S1608 In, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores a fourth special pattern table according to various conditions such as a winning lottery result, an upper limit number, and the number of parts in the first half section, and the fourth special pattern table is stored in step S1607. In the processing, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the fourth special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected fourth special pattern table. The fourth special pattern table is roughly divided into a table group corresponding to the jackpot result and a table group corresponding to the missed result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, there is a difference in the selection rate so that the effect pattern with a large number of consecutive effects is easier to be selected than the effect pattern with a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to increase.

In the table group corresponding to the deviation result, a difference in the selection rate is provided so that the effect pattern having a large number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the transition to the reach display is more easily selected than the effect pattern having a small number of consecutive times. When the second special effect is intervened to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the first of the first special effect groups (parts) divided into front and back by the second special effect after the second special effect. The structure is such that the number of consecutive special productions tends to decrease.

The basic configuration of the 4th special pattern table is the same as that of the 2nd special pattern table, but there are many effect patterns for the effect pattern in which the number of consecutive times of the first special effect executed before the reach display transition is small. The bias of the selectivity of is increasing. In the game times in which the fourth special pattern table is referred to, the number of parts in the first half section tends to be smaller than in the game times in which the second special pattern table is referred to. By increasing the bias of the selection rate as described above, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive times before the reach display even when the number of parts in the first half section is small.

As described in detail above, by dividing one game time into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner and making it appear as if the game times are progressing at a short pitch, it is as if the player is in the time-saving staging mode. Can give an impression.

After executing the processes of steps S1604 to S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609 to execute the effect setting process. In the special effect mode of the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a under the situation where the first special effect is repeated. In some cases. Similar to the effect displayed during pseudo continuous fluctuation display in the normal effect mode, this effect has a total of 6 colors of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and white <blue <yellow <green <. It is set so that the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of red <rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1609, the final effect color and its step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1604 to S1608. In the case of a jackpot result, it is easier to select the final effect in the order of white <blue <yellow <rainbow <green <red. The effect set in step S1609 is canceled at the end of the reach display in this game.

Incidentally, the effect displayed in the special effect mode may be displayed even in the game times corresponding to the completely out-of-order result. The effect that started to be displayed in the game times corresponding to the completely off result is basically canceled when any of the second special effect, the third special effect, and the end of the reach display ends, and the first special effect is performed. It is configured so that it cannot be released under repeated circumstances. Therefore, the effect display may be continued across the game times. In consideration of such circumstances, in the special effect mode, the number of consecutive steps of the first special effect and the number of step-ups of the effect do not always match, and the number of step-ups is determined by deferring the color of the effect. May decrease.

In the case of the reach out result, it is easy to select in the order of red <green <yellow <blue <white, and the rainbow is out of the selection candidates. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the case of a complete deviation result, the final effect is easily selected in the order of yellow <blue <white, and green, red, and rainbow are excluded from the selection candidates. In the normal production mode, the rainbow color corresponds to the jackpot, and the green, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the super reach. By excluding some colors from the selection candidates according to the game result, the relationship between the display of the effect in the normal effect mode and the display of the effect in the special effect mode is given.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process for the special effect mode shown in FIG. 38 (a), when a negative determination is made in both steps S1501 and S1502, that is, when the game times correspond to the complete deviation result, The process proceeds to step S1504. After executing the special effect setting process for complete removal in step S1504, the effect determination process for the special effect mode is terminated. Here, the special effect setting process for complete removal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

(Special effect setting process for complete removal)
In the special effect setting process for complete deviation, first, in step S1701, the number of divisions (number of parts) obtained by dividing the variation display time of the game times by the above-mentioned reference time (2 sec) which is the execution time of the first special effect is calculated. .. If a remainder is generated by division, it is rounded up to the number of divisions. This is a device for using a part of the fixed display time (2 sec) after the variable display time as the execution time of the first special effect or the like. In view of such circumstances, it can be said that in the calculation of step S1701, the entire section, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (2 sec), is divided by the reference time. In this case, the remainder is rounded down.

For example, when the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is a remainder of 1, and is rounded up to "9". That is, when the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of parts is "9". When the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 7 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "8". That is, when the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of parts is "8". When the variation display time is 3 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is 1 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "2". That is, when the variable display time is 3 sec, the number of parts is "2". When the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of divisions obtained by dividing this by the reference time is a remainder of 0, and is rounded up to "1". That is, when the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of parts is "1".

In the following step S1702, the number of consecutive times (upper limit) at which the first special effect can be continuously executed in the main game is referred to the continuous number setting table for complete deviation and the random number for lottery stored in the ROM 443. Set.

"1" to "3" are provided as the number of consecutive times in the continuous number setting table for complete deviation, and any one of these three candidates is set as the upper limit in this game. In the continuous number setting table for complete deviation, the selection probability is configured to increase in the order of "1" <"2" <"3". Even if a large upper limit is set due to the influence of the fluctuation display time and the continuous result in the previous game times, the actual number of consecutive times is smaller than that. Therefore, in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation, the selection probability is stipulated so that the upper limit tends to be large, thereby suppressing the frequent occurrence of interventions such as the second special effect. ..

In the following step S1703, the number of times of the first special effect executed before the start of the main game round (for example, in the immediately preceding game round) with reference to the continuous counter provided in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140. (Continuous result), specifically, the number of times the first special effect is repeated without sandwiching another effect (continuous result) is specified.

After executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not the main game round is the final game round in the special effect mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special effect mode end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. The special effect mode end flag is a flag stored in step S1209 of the special effect mode process (see FIG. 29).

If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the subsequent pending information is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1707, the first setting process is executed in step S1707, and then the effect pattern setting process for complete disengagement is performed. finish. That is, even if it is not the final game round in the continuous effect mode, the first setting process is executed when the subsequent hold information exists or when the subsequent hold information does not exist but the effect does not occur. Will be done. Here, the first setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

(First setting process)
In the first setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the total number of parts is equal to or greater than the above upper limit of the number of consecutive times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is 0, that is, whether or not consideration for the flow of the previous game round is necessary.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the fifth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The fifth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1803, the fifth special pattern table corresponding to the present condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected fifth special pattern table.

For example, when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3" and the total number of parts is "9", the one corresponding to those conditions is selected from each fifth special pattern table. The fifth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A5, B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 (see FIG. 45A).

The staging pattern A5 has a configuration in which the first special staging is applied to the first to third parts, the second special staging is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the first special staging is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. The first special effect group is divided into front and back by the second special effect. In this effect pattern A5, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed three times at the beginning of the game round, and the second special effect is executed. The first special effect is repeated three times until the game round is completed. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec) is set. As time passes, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed three times with the second special effect in between. That is, due to the intervening second special effect, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half portion becomes "3" including the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the latter half portion becomes "2". The game round ends with the number of continuous fluctuations being "2".

The production pattern B5 is the first special production in the first to second parts, the second special production in the third to fifth parts, the first special production in the sixth part, and the second in the seventh to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern B5, the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the game, the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect is executed again with the first special effect sandwiched between them. To.

The production pattern C5 is the first special production in the first part, the second special production in the second to fourth parts, the first special production in the fifth to sixth parts, and the second in the seventh to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern C5, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the game, the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect is executed again with the first special effect sandwiched between the two times. To.

The staging pattern D5 is the first special staging in the first part, the second special staging in the second to fourth parts, the first special staging in the fifth part, the second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and the second. The structure is such that the first special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this effect pattern D5, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

The staging pattern E5 has a configuration in which the second special staging is applied to the first to third parts, the first special staging is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special staging is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. ing. In this effect pattern E5, the first special effect is executed three times after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the second special effect is executed again.

The production pattern F5 is the second special production in the first to third parts, the first special production in the fourth to fifth parts, the second special production in the sixth to eighth parts, and the first in the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern F5, the first special effect is executed twice after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the first special effect is executed once again after the second special effect. To.

The production pattern G5 has a second special production in the first to third parts, a first special production in the fourth part, a second special production in the fifth to seventh parts, and a first in the eighth to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern G5, the first special effect is executed once after the second special effect is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the first special effect is executed twice again after the second special effect. To.

In this way, by using the first special effect and the second special effect together to make one game time appear to be divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner, the player feels as if the player is in the time-saving effect mode. Can be given.

In the fifth special pattern table described in detail above, the number of times the second special effect is executed (part occupancy rate) in the effect pattern A5 is smaller than that of the effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5. The selection rate of each effect pattern is also set so that the effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, G5 <effect pattern A5. This prevents the frequency of appearance of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the fifth special pattern table, the game times are terminated by either the first special effect or the second special effect, but the number of continuous fluctuations when the game times are completed by the second special effect. Is configured to be "3" at the maximum, and the number of continuous fluctuations when the game round is completed in the first special effect is configured to be "2" at the maximum. The reason why the effect pattern in which the game times end in the first special effect is provided is to secure an opportunity to take over the number of continuous fluctuations to the next game times on the premise that the next game times are coming up. Is. However, in such a configuration, it may be necessary to secure a time to end the continuous fluctuation in the next game round. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, as a special effect that triggers the end of continuous fluctuation, a third special effect that requires a shorter time than the second special effect is provided in addition to the second special effect. There is. Regarding this third special effect, the required time is set so that the third special effect can be executed even when the variation display time of the next game round is the shortest (for example, 1 sec). As a result, even if the continuous fluctuation is inherited to the next game round, the opportunity to end the continuous fluctuation in the next game round is secured.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, when the previous game round is completed by the first special effect (when the continuous result is not "0"), step S1804 is performed. move on. In step S1804, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the sixth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The sixth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the total number of parts, and the continuous result from the previous game times. In the process of step S1804, the sixth special pattern table corresponding to the present condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected sixth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the total number of parts is "9", and the continuous result from the previous game round is "1", the one corresponding to those conditions is selected from each of the sixth special pattern tables. select. The sixth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A6, B6, C6, D6, and E6 (see FIG. 45B).

The production pattern A6 is the first special production in the first part, the second special production in the second to fourth parts, the first special production in the fifth to sixth parts, and the second in the seventh to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern A6, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the game, the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect ends. After that, the second special effect is executed again with the first special effect sandwiched between the two times. Specifically, the girl character CP1 reciprocates left and right on the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol sequence fluctuates in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33A), and a predetermined fluctuating display time (1 sec) is set. With the passage of time, the flow in which the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is temporarily stopped and displayed is executed a total of three times counting from the previous game times, and is executed twice again with the second special effect in between. In the first half of this game, the number of continuous fluctuations inherited from the previous game is suppressed to "3". Then, in the latter half of the main game round, the game round ends with the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations thereof is also suppressed to "2".

The staging pattern B6 is the first special staging in the first part, the second special staging in the second to fourth parts, the first special staging in the fifth part, the second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and the second. The first special effect is applied to each of the nine parts, and the first special effect group is divided into front and back by the second special effect. In this effect pattern B6, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

The staging pattern C6 has a configuration in which the second special staging is applied to the first to third parts, the first special staging is applied to the fourth to sixth parts, and the second special staging is applied to the seventh to ninth parts. ing.

The staging pattern D6 is a second special staging in the first to third parts, a first special staging in the fourth to fifth parts, a second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and a first in the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The production pattern E6 has a second special production in the first to third parts, a first special production in the fourth part, a second special production in the fifth to seventh parts, and a first in the eighth to ninth parts. It is configured to apply each special effect.

In this way, by using the first special effect and the second special effect together to make one game time appear to be divided into a plurality of game times in a pseudo manner, the player feels as if the player is in the time-saving effect mode. Can be given.

In the sixth special pattern table described in detail above, the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the sixth special pattern table is already concerned when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game round. When the sixth special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game times has been acquired and the interval time from the previous game times exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly classified into the sixth special pattern table Y, which is referred to when the hold information related to the game round is not acquired at the end of the previous game round.

In the sixth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect patterns C6, D6 and E6 in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. It is set to be high. The sixth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 is lower than that of the sixth special pattern table X, and the preferential treatment of the effect patterns A6 and B6 over other effect patterns is eliminated. Has been done.

When the earlier game times and the later game times are continuously executed so that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game times. 2 It is suppressed from giving the player the impression that the occurrence of the special effect indicates the start of the game round, and the break between the game rounds is made inconspicuous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 44 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the total number of parts of the current game is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the seventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The seventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1806, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the 7th special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected 7th special pattern table.

The basic configuration of the 7th special pattern table is the same as that of the 5th special pattern table. There is a difference in. The bias of the selection rate is larger than that of the 5th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to gain an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. ..

Returning to the description of step S1805, when a negative determination is made in step S1805, that is, when the previous game round is completed except for the first special effect (when the continuous counter is not 0), step S1807 In, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores the eighth special pattern table according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the total number of parts, and the continuous result from the previous game times. In the process of step S1807, the eighth special pattern table corresponding to the present condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected eighth special pattern table.

The basic configuration of the eighth special pattern table is the same as that of the sixth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the eighth special pattern table is already concerned when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game round. When the 8th special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game times has been acquired and the interval time from the previous game times exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly classified into the eighth special pattern table Y which is referred to when the hold information related to the game round is not acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The eighth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. .. The eighth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 at which the first special effect is executed is lower than that of the eighth special pattern table X, and other effect patterns. The preferential treatment for

When the earlier game times and the later game times are continuously executed so that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game times. 2 It is suppressed from giving the player the impression that the occurrence of the special effect indicates the start of the game round, and the break between the game rounds is made inconspicuous.

In the 8th special pattern table, as in the 6th special pattern, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the effect pattern having a large number of consecutive times of the 1st special effect can be easily selected as compared with the effect pattern in which the number of consecutive times of the 1st special effect is small. ing. However, this bias in the selection rate is larger than that of the 6th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to gain an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. It has become.

After setting the effect pattern in the processes of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, the effect setting process is executed in step S1808, and then the first setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the special effect mode of the present embodiment, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set to follow the outer periphery of the display screen 253a under the situation where the first special effect is repeated. The effect may be displayed. Similar to the effect displayed during pseudo continuous fluctuation display in the normal effect mode, this effect has a total of 6 colors of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and white <blue <yellow <green. It is set so that the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of <red <rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1808, whether or not to display the effect, the color of the effect, and the step-up pattern thereof are determined based on the result of this game and the effect pattern determined in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may be continued until the main game round across the game rounds. Therefore, if the effect is inherited from the previous game, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and if the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is used. decide. The step-up pattern also includes information on which part to cancel the effect and information on whether or not to take over the effect to a later game.

If the effect display has not been inherited from the previous game, or if the effect is canceled in the middle even if it has been inherited, it is decided whether or not to generate a new effect, and the color and step-up of the effect. Determine the pattern. Incidentally, the step-up timing of the effect is configured to be the timing at which the re-variation of the temporarily stopped symbol is started.

Returning to the description of the special effect setting process for complete removal in FIG. 43, if it is the final game round in the special effect mode, or if the effect is being generated even though the subsequent hold information is not reserved, step S1708. After executing the second setting process, the process for setting the special effect for complete removal is terminated. Here, the second setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

(Second setting process)
In the second setting process, first, the third special effect is set in the final part in step S1901. The third special effect is an effect corresponding to the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 34 (a)) executed in the time-saving effect mode described above. Specifically, in the game times related to the end of the special effect mode, the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display to the final display. Then, at the end of the final display, the darkening is canceled, the reduced display of the symbol is canceled, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal effect mode. The end suggestion effect is configured so that it can occur in the game times other than the game times related to the end of the time saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a is darkened during the variable display to the final display, the display of the time saving effect mode is continued after the darkening is canceled with the end of the final display.

As for the third special effect, among the end suggestion effect data stored in the display control device 410, the data whose execution time matches the reference time (data having 2 sec) is used. In the subsequent processing, the effect pattern is determined for the remaining parts.

After executing the process of step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining parts excluding the final part is equal to or greater than the above upper limit of the number of consecutive times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, whether or not consideration is required for the flow of the previous game times.

If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the continuous counter is "0", that is, if the previous game round has ended except for the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the ninth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The ninth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1904, the 9th special pattern table corresponding to the present condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected 9th special pattern table.

For example, when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3" and the number of remaining parts is "8" (the total number of parts is "9"), select the one corresponding to those conditions from each 9th special pattern table. do. The ninth special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A9, B9, C9, D9, and E9 (see FIG. 48 (a)).

The staging pattern A9 is the first special staging in the first to third parts, the second special staging in the fourth to sixth parts, the first special staging in the seventh to eighth parts, and the above-mentioned ninth in the ninth part. Each of the three special effects is applied, and the first special effect group is divided into front and back by the second special effect. At the last part of the game round, the third special effect is executed, the game round ends, and the special effect mode ends accordingly.

The production pattern B9 is the first special production in the first to second parts, the second special production in the third to fifth parts, the first special production in the sixth to eighth parts, and the third in the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect. In this effect pattern B9, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the second special effect is executed after the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the game round, and the second special effect is executed. By the time the game round is completed, three first special effects and one third special effect are executed. Due to the intervention of the second special effect, the number of continuous fluctuations in the first half portion becomes "3" including the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the latter half portion becomes "3" including the third special effect. Then, the special production mode ends with the game times.

The staging pattern C9 has a first special staging in the first part, a second special staging in the second to fourth parts, a first special staging in the fifth part, a second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and the second. The structure is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

The staging pattern D9 is a second special staging in the first to third parts, a first special staging in the fourth to fifth parts, a second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and a third in the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The staging pattern E9 has a second special staging in the first to third parts, a first special staging in the fourth part, a second special staging in the fifth to seventh parts, a first special staging in the eighth part, and the first. The structure is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

In the ninth special pattern table described in detail above, the number of times the second special effect is executed (part occupancy rate) in the effect patterns A9 and B9 is smaller than that of the effect patterns C9, D9, and E9, and each effect pattern. The selection rate of is also set so that the effect patterns C9, D9, E9 <effect patterns A9, B9. This prevents the frequency of appearance of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Returning to the description of FIG. 47, if a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the previous game round has ended in the first special effect (when the continuous result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S1904. .. In step S1904, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the tenth special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The tenth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as an upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining parts, and the continuous result from the previous game times. In the process of step S1904, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the tenth special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected tenth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the number of remaining parts is "8" (the total number of parts is "9"), and the continuous result from the previous game is "1", it is in each 10th special pattern table. Select the one that corresponds to those conditions from. The 19th special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is provided with effect patterns A10, B10, and C10 (see FIG. 48 (b)).

The staging pattern A10 has a first special staging in the first part, a second special staging in the second to fourth parts, a first special staging in the fifth part, a second special staging in the sixth to eighth parts, and the second. The structure is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts.

The production pattern B10 has a second special production in the first to third parts, a first special production in the fourth to fifth parts, a second special production in the sixth to eighth parts, and a third in the ninth part. It is configured to apply each special effect.

The staging pattern C10 has a second special staging in the first to third parts, a first special staging in the fourth part, a second special staging in the fifth to seventh parts, a first special staging in the eighth part, and the first. The structure is such that the third special effect is applied to each of the nine parts. In this effect pattern C10, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the third special effect is executed after the second special effect and the first special effect are alternately executed, and each second special effect intervenes. Depending on the production, the number of continuous fluctuations in the early stage is "2" including the second special effect, the number of continuous fluctuations in the middle stage is "1" including the second special effect, and the number of continuous fluctuations in the final stage is the third. It becomes "1" including the special effect. Then, the special production mode ends with the game times.

In the tenth special pattern table described in detail above, similarly to the sixth special pattern table, the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the tenth special pattern table is already concerned when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game round. When the tenth special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game times has been acquired and the interval time from the previous game times exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly classified into the tenth special pattern table Y which is referred to when the hold information related to the game round is not acquired at the end of the previous game round.

In the tenth special pattern table X, the selection rate of the effect pattern A10 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect patterns B10 and C10 in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. It is set. The tenth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern A10 is lower than that of the tenth special pattern table X.

When the earlier game times and the later game times are continuously executed so that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game times. 2 It is suppressed from giving the player the impression that the occurrence of the special effect indicates the start of the game round, and the break between the game rounds is made inconspicuous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 47 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the number of remaining parts of the current game is less than the upper limit of the number of consecutive games, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined with reference to the eleventh special pattern table stored in the ROM 443. The eleventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the number of consecutive times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1907, the one corresponding to the current condition is selected from the 11th special pattern table, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected 11th special pattern table.

The basic configuration of the 11th special pattern table is the same as that of the 9th special pattern table, and the selection rate is such that a large number of effect patterns can be easily selected as compared with an effect pattern in which the number of consecutive times of the 1st special effect is small. There is a difference in. The bias of the selection rate is larger than that of the 5th special pattern table, and even if the number of remaining parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to earn an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. ..

Returning to the explanation of step S1906, when a negative determination is made in step S1906, that is, when the previous game round has ended other than the first special effect (when the continuous counter is not 0), step S1908. In, the effect pattern (the distribution pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) in the main game is determined in consideration of the flow from the previous game. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores a twelfth special pattern table according to various conditions such as an upper limit of the number of consecutive times, the number of remaining parts, and continuous results from the previous game times. In the process of step S1908, the twelfth special pattern table corresponding to the present condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined with reference to the selected twelfth special pattern table.

The basic configuration of the twelfth special pattern table is the same as that of the tenth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the effect pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the twelfth special pattern table is already concerned when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode, that is, at the end of the previous game round. When the 12th special pattern table X referred to when the hold information related to the game times has been acquired and the interval time from the previous game times exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) under the low frequency support mode. That is, it is roughly classified into the twelfth special pattern table Y which is referred to when the hold information related to the game round is not acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The twelfth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. .. The twelfth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern on which the first special effect is executed is lower than that of the twelfth special pattern table X.

When the first game times and the second game times are continuously executed so that the interval time is minimized, the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game times. 2 The same function as the 10th special pattern table in that it suppresses giving the player the impression that the occurrence of the special effect indicates the start of the game round and makes the break between the game rounds inconspicuous. Is given.

In the twelfth special pattern table, a difference is provided in the selection rate so that the effect pattern having a large number of consecutive times of the first special effect can be easily selected as compared with the effect pattern having a small number of consecutive times of the first special effect as in the tenth special pattern. ing. However, this bias in the selection rate is larger than that of the 10th special pattern table, and even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit, it is possible to gain an opportunity to execute the 1st special effect. It has become.

After setting the effect pattern in the processes of steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the effect setting process is executed in step S1909, and then the second setting process ends.

The effect setting process in step S1909 is the same as the effect setting process in step S1809. Determine the color and its step-up pattern. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may be continued until the main game round across the game rounds. Therefore, if the effect is inherited from the previous game, it is decided whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher one, and if the color is updated, a step-up pattern to that color is used. decide. The step-up pattern also includes information about which part to cancel the effect.

If the effect display has not been inherited from the previous game, or if the effect is canceled in the middle even if it has been inherited, it is decided whether or not to generate a new effect, and the color and step-up of the effect. Determine the pattern. The second setting process determines the effect pattern of the final game times in the special effect mode, and all the displayed effects are canceled by the end of the game times.

According to the special effect mode described in detail above, by dividing one game into a plurality of times, it is possible to generate the same effect as the effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode (time saving effect mode) during the low frequency support mode. It has become. In the time-saving effect mode, the lottery mode may be a high-probability mode, so there are many chances of winning a big hit during the time-saving effect mode. That is, it is easier for the player to pay attention to it as compared with the normal production mode. Therefore, by making it appear that the same effect as that of the time saving effect mode is performed by the special effect mode, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. Considering that the game is often performed in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, diversifying the production in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode as described above improves the interest of the game. It is effective in planning.

When the same effect as in the time-saving effect mode is executed in the special effect mode, there is a possibility that the perception of the effect may differ greatly depending on the skill level of the player, the knowledge possessed, and the like. For example, in the case of a player who is not accustomed to the game, it is assumed that the special effect mode is visually recognized as the effect mode similar to the time-saving effect mode, and the above effect can be exhibited. In the case of a player who is familiar with the game, it is difficult to identify that the base game state is different between the special effect mode and the time-saving effect mode, even if they look the same. It is assumed that there is no such thing. In addition, when the stored hold information includes the information corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to shift to the special effect mode as compared with the case where the information corresponding to the jackpot result is not included. If the configuration is such that the pass / fail information is added to the transition condition to the special effect mode, it is possible to suppress the discrepancy between the expectation for the special effect mode and the expectation for the time-saving effect mode.

On the other hand, in the case of a player having some knowledge, there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous variation display generated in the normal effect mode and the continuous variation in the special effect mode are the same. In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, the expectation of a big hit increases dramatically as the number of consecutive numbers increases, so it is assumed that the game is played with the expectation that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation will continue. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 50, when the game times are divided into a plurality of parts and the first special effect is executed in all the parts, the behavior can be brought closer to the time saving effect mode. The number of continuous fluctuations will be large. In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, when the number of times is 4 times, the super reach or higher is confirmed, and when the number of times is 6 times, the big hit is confirmed. On the other hand, when the number of continuous fluctuations in the special effect mode exceeds those thresholds, even if the number of continuous fluctuations increases, it does not lead to a big hit, which increases the dissatisfaction of the player and reduces the motivation to play. It is feared that it will become. In other words, if the same effect as the effect mode for the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is realized within the constraint of the effect mode for the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the player's misunderstanding is suppressed. Ingenuity is required.

In this respect, in the special effect mode shown in the present embodiment, the second special effect is intervened in the first special effect group to indicate the end of the continuous variation (the continuous variation seems to be interrupted), which causes the above-mentioned inconvenience. Is suppressed.

In the notification / staging control device 140 that has acquired the fluctuation display time information from the main control device 162, the fluctuation display time is divided by the reference time. Then, the effect pattern is determined by allocating the first special effect to the third special effect to each of the divided parts. The first special effect has a configuration in which the same effect data as the effect executed in the time-saving effect mode is diverted, and the amount of data related to the game effect is reduced.

In addition, although the variable display time can be set in various ways, when the number of parts is calculated by the above calculation and the table to be referred to is switched based on the result, there are many conditions for determining the effect. In addition, it is preferable because it can promote data sharing. For example, even if the variable display time is different, the same table can be referred to if various conditions with the number of parts are the same. Therefore, it is advantageous as compared with the case where the table is provided for each variable display time.

Here, the execution time of the second special effect and the third special effect is an integral multiple of the execution time of the first special effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excess or deficiency of time due to the allocation of the first special effect to the third special effect. This is a preferable configuration for facilitating the flow of the production.

The execution time of the third special effect is the same as the execution time of the first special effect (equal magnification). Specifically, it is 2 sec, which is shorter than the sum of the shortest variation display time of 1 sec and the definite display time of 2 sec in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, if the variation display time for at least one part can be secured, the continuation of the first special effect can be stopped, and the continuous variation is divided and the continuous variation is divided by the third special effect in any game times in the special effect mode. The end of the special effect mode can be suitably executed. Further, this third special effect is also useful for improving the degree of freedom of the effect pattern by coordinating with the earlier game times and the later game times.

In the time-saving effect mode, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the right route, each game round progresses in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the first special effect, the variable display time and the temporary stop display time are both set to 1 sec, and the execution time of the first special effect is set to match one game time in the time saving effect mode. In this case, in the situation where the first special effect is repeated, the appearance is the same as the progress in the special effect mode, and the mimicry effect can be suitably exhibited. However, the definite display time is 2 sec in the game times in the low frequency support mode, which is longer than the definite display time (1 sec) in the game times in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in the special effect mode, the flow of the effect may be uncomfortable due to the influence of the interval between the game times. It is assumed that such a sense of incongruity becomes noticeable when the game times corresponding to the complete deviation are repeated.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation, a part of the special effect set at the end is configured to overlap the final display. This makes it possible to make the interval look shorter than it actually is. Specifically, the variable display time in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation is an odd number, and is not divisible by the reference time, which is an even number. The value obtained by subtracting this remainder from the reference time is shorter than the confirmed display time. As a result, a base for using a part of the fixed display time as time for special production is constructed. In this way, by devising the length of the variable display time, the length of the reference time, and the length of the fixed display time, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems without significantly changing the existing configuration. ..

In the special effect mode, the second special effect intervenes in order to prevent the continuous number from becoming excessive. This effect also occurs in the time-saving effect mode. As shown in FIGS. 24 (b) and 24 (c), in the game times corresponding to complete deviation, the second special effect (branch effect) is supported regardless of the number of stored information on hold. The variable display time may be set. As a result, the second special effect is suppressed from being conspicuous in the special effect mode.

In the time-saving effect mode, the digestion speed of the game times is increased, but the game progress may be monotonous. Therefore, the monotonous effect is suppressed by specifying the hold information related to the later game times and executing the advance notice effect (effect display) based on the result. Here, in the special effect mode, the effect display is executed according to the effect pattern in the game times. By executing the same display effect as the time-saving effect mode in this way, the discrepancy between the time-saving effect mode and the special effect mode is suppressed.

In the special effect mode, the number of times the first special effect to the third special effect (unit display) are executed is stored, and the number of times the special effect (unit display) is executed is at least the minimum end reference number of times in the high frequency support mode. The special effect mode is maintained until the same number of times as. As a result, the discrepancy between the special effect mode and the time-saving effect mode is suppressed.

The various special pattern tables are configured so that the number of times the first special effect is executed tends to increase. Since the occurrence rate of the branching effect is low even in the time saving effect mode, the occurrence of such an inconvenience is suppressed by suppressing the occurrence of the second special effect.

Increasing the degree of freedom in setting the first special effect by coordinating with the previous game times and the later game times secures as many opportunities as possible to execute the first special effect in the configuration where the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive games. Preferred above.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the time required for the reach display when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode is fixed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of reach display time (for example, long / short) is provided, and one of the required times is selected each time in the game in which Super Reach D is executed. It is one of the features that it is. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the special effect mode in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

The ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 stores a required time selection table for reach display, which defines the required time for reach display in the game times corresponding to the super reach D. In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, when the fluctuation start command and the type command are received from the main control device 162, the game times to be executed this time are performed based on the fluctuation display time information and the pass / fail information included in those commands. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to Super Reach D, and if the game times this time correspond to Super Reach D, the required time (long / short) is determined with reference to the above required time selection table. The difference in these required times is set to be an integral multiple of the above-mentioned reference time.

If the required time for reach display is different, the length of the remaining time excluding the required time for reach display will be different even if the variable display time is the same. That is, the calculation result when the number of parts is calculated by the special effect setting process for reach (step S1512) shown in FIG. 38 (b) depends on the time required for the reach display.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51, when "long" is selected as the required time for reach display (see Example 2), the number of parts before reach display is five, whereas the reach display is displayed. When "short" is selected as the required time (see Example 1), the number of parts before the reach display is six. That is, in the "short", which is easy to be selected when the result is a big hit, the number of parts in which the first special effect can be executed is one more than in the "long". Therefore, it is easier to secure the execution opportunity of the first special effect when "short" is selected than when "long" is selected as the required time.

When the reach display is executed in the normal effect mode, the time required for the reach display is set to be longer in the variable display mode in which the jackpot expectation is set higher. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned time required time selection table for reach display, the time required for reach display is set to be shorter for the game times corresponding to the jackpot result than for the game times corresponding to the off result. It has an easy structure. That is, in the game times in which the super reach D is executed, in the case of a big hit result, the number of parts until the transition to the reach display tends to be larger than that of the missed result.

In the special effect mode, the degree of freedom in allocating the first special effect and the second special effect can be increased by earning the number of parts before shifting to the reach display. As a result, it becomes easy to earn the number of continuous fluctuations until the transition to the reach display, and it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the effect in the special effect mode.

<Third embodiment>
In the special effect mode shown in the second embodiment, the required time for reach display is determined based on the fluctuation display time information and the pass / fail information from the main control device 162. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the determination of the required time is partially different from the second embodiment.

Specifically, when the required time for reach display is determined in the special effect mode of the present embodiment, the continuous result from the previous game round is added to the fluctuation display time information and the pass / fail information from the main control device 162. And the above upper limit in the game times are referred to. In other words, in determining the required time for reach display, the continuous result from the previous game and the set upper limit are added, that is, the reach display is based on the specification of the continuous result and the setting of the upper limit. The time required for this is determined.

More specifically, the required time selection table for reach display stored in the ROM 443 of the notification / effect control device 140 includes variable display time information, hit / miss information, continuous results from the previous game times, and the above upper limit in the game times. It is stored in association with various conditions. From these required time selection tables, the required time for reach display is determined from "short", "middle", and "long" by referring to the one corresponding to this condition. For "Short", the number of parts that can execute the first special effect is one more than that of "Middle", and for "Middle", the part that can execute the second special effect is 1 compared to "Long". It is configured to be one more.

For example, if the number of parts is halfway even though it is desired to earn the continuous fluctuation number following the reach display in the game times, an event that it is difficult to earn the continuous fluctuation number may occur. Specifically, if the required time is set to "middle" and the number of parts in the first section excluding the part for the second special production (second section) before the transition to reach display becomes "7", By applying the first special effect to all the parts of the first section, the number of continuous fluctuations following the reach display becomes "7", which exceeds the upper limit of the number of continuous fluctuations of "6". If the second special effect is set in the first section, such an inconvenience can be avoided, but the number of continuous fluctuations following the reach display becomes extremely small. In the time required time selection table for reach display in the present embodiment, in such a case, the time required for reach display is intentionally lengthened by one part, that is, the number of parts in the first section is intentionally reduced by one. "Long" is easy to select. More specifically, it is configured so that the selection probability increases in the order of "middle" <"short" <"long".

With the configuration described in detail above, it is possible to suppress the number of continuous fluctuations from becoming extremely small in the game times corresponding to Super Reach D, and the number of continuous fluctuations becomes extremely large in the game times corresponding to Super Reach D. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the technical idea shown in the second embodiment that the number of continuous fluctuations can be set in a manner suitable for the situation can be more preferably embodied.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the effect pattern in the special effect mode is determined, the effect pattern in the previous game round (specifically, the above-mentioned continuous result) is taken into consideration. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the effect pattern is taken into consideration in the game times after the game times when the effect pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the determination of the effect pattern in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52 and the timing chart of FIG. 53. In addition, since the main configuration is common to the first embodiment in the present embodiment, the description of the common configuration will be omitted.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the cooperation setting process is executed as a part of the effect determination process (specifically, the first setting process) for the special effect mode. The linkage setting process is a process executed when the current game round is a game round corresponding to a complete deviation and the subsequent hold information is already stored at the start of the game round, and is executed in step S1803. This is a process executed before the determination process of S1804, S1806, and S1807.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the cooperation setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the next game round corresponds to the reach display. As described above, the hold command transmitted from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140 includes fluctuation display time information, pass / fail information, and the like, and the notification / effect control device 140 includes these information. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the next game round corresponds to the reach display. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the next game round corresponds to complete deviation, the setting process for this cooperation is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2001, the details of the effect pattern of the next game round are confirmed in step S2002. Specifically, the number of parts (the number of parts in the first section) until the transition to the reach display is performed in the next game round is calculated. In the following step S2003, when the number of parts constituting the first section of the next game round is substantially the upper limit (that is, "6" when corresponding to the jackpot result, and corresponds to the out-of-game result). Is less than "5"). If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the setting process for this linkage is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined by lottery whether or not the game times can be linked with the next game times. If the cooperation with the next game round is not performed, a negative determination is made in step S2005, and the setting process for this cooperation is terminated as it is. When linking with the next game round, an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, and the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, the upper limit of the number of consecutive times across the game times is set. After that, in step S2007, the special pattern table to be referred to in the game times and the next game times is selected, and the setting process for this cooperation is completed. In the determination process of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, when the special pattern table is selected in step S2007, the effect pattern is determined with reference to the special pattern table, and the selection is not made. The effect pattern is determined with reference to the special pattern table selected in the same flow as in the first embodiment.

Here, with reference to FIG. 53, an effect pattern when cooperation occurs will be illustrated. At the timing of tc1 during the confirmation display, a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, and the number of stored information on hold is increased from "1" to "2". When the game round starts at the timing of ct2, the variable display of the pattern on the upper operating port display unit of the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 are started.

The game times correspond to complete deviation, and the next game times correspond to a big hit. For the next game round, the variable display time is 22 sec, and the number of parts is "3" in the time (first section) excluding the reach display and the branching effect immediately before it. Therefore, the number of times that the first specific effect can be executed in the first section of the next game round is "3", that is, the reach display (branch effect) is included when the continuous fluctuation is performed in the next game round alone. The maximum number of continuous fluctuations is "3". For the next game, it corresponds to the hit result, and the upper limit of the actual number of continuous fluctuations is "6", so the number of parts in the first section is insufficient to perform continuous fluctuations for this upper limit. There is.

When starting a game round at the timing of ct2, it is decided by lottery whether or not to cooperate with the next game round. In the example of FIG. 54, the case where the lottery is won is exemplified. In the game round started at the timing of ct2, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning, and the second special effect is executed at the timing of ct3 thereafter. After that, in the latter half of the game, the first special effect is executed twice in succession. The first special effect to be executed at the end will end after the definite display of the design on the display unit for the upper working port and the design on the design display device 253 is started at the timing of tc5.

When the next game round starts at the timing of tk6 immediately after the first special effect is completed, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 253 are started again. At the beginning of the next game round, the first special effect is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times of the first special effect is five times across the previous game round to the next game round. Then, when the second special effect as the branch effect is started at the timing of ct7, the number of continuous fluctuations including the second special effect becomes "5", and the reach display is started at the timing of ct8. The next game round corresponds to the jackpot result, and at the timing of tk9, the stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is started on the display unit for the operating port, and the jackpot display device 253. The stop display (confirmed display) of the symbol combination corresponding to the result will be started.

In this way, if the configuration is such that the outline of the effect pattern of the next game time is taken into consideration when determining the effect pattern in the previous game time, it is possible to relax the restriction on the number of continuous fluctuations. If it becomes possible to earn a continuous fluctuation number by the next game round (1 game round) alone, the continuous fluctuation number can be appropriately set according to the result of winning or failing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is performed by executing the same effect as the time saving effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the special effect mode in the low frequency support mode. It is configured to suppress the monotonicization of the game in. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the definite display time are shortened as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the game progress is speeded up. In order to make it appear as if the special effect mode was used to suddenly shift to the time-saving effect mode during the low-frequency support mode, it is important how to resemble the effect in the special effect mode and the effect in the time-saving effect mode. .. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment, by diverting the moving image or the like used in the special production mode to the normal production mode, it is technically possible to reduce the difference in appearance between the productions in both production modes. it makes sense.

However, due to the difference in the premised game state between the time-saving effect mode and the special effect mode, the appearance may be slightly uncomfortable due to the diversion of the effect. Hereinafter, the cause of this discomfort will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. In FIG. 54, the time related to the symbol display for the operation port display unit of the main display unit is Ta, and the time related to the symbol display for the display screen 253a (specifically, the variable display area ME, the reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253. Is distinguished as Tb.

When the normal effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (fixed display time) Ta1 of the pattern and the symbol display device 253 in the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 The final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb1 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the It coincides with the final stop display start timing of the symbol in. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the time saving effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the variable display time and the confirmed display time of the pattern and the symbol in each game time are shortened as compared with the low frequency support mode. However, as in the normal effect mode, the stop display time (confirmed display time) Ta2 of the pattern on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 87 and the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253). The final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb2 of the symbol in the above coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol in the operation port display unit and the final stop display start timing of the symbol in the symbol display device 253. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

On the other hand, when the special effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (fixed display time) Ta3 of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is set. The final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb3 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 253. Although the final stop display start timing of the symbol is the same, the temporary stop display time Tb4 of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 matches the final stop display time Ta2 and Tb2 of the symbol and the symbol in the time saving effect mode. , The final display time of the pattern and the pattern in the special effect mode is shorter than Ta3 and Tb3.

Therefore, during the special effect mode, the display on the symbol display device 253 is the same as the display in the time saving effect mode under the situation where the first special effect is repeated during the variable display of the pattern, and the display content on the symbol display device 253. It is difficult to identify the difference between the time-saving effect mode and the special effect mode just by looking at it. Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb4 when the temporary stop display is performed is shorter than the fixed display times Ta3 and Tb3, so that the progress is slightly delayed at the fixed display as compared with the temporary stop display. It will be. In the first embodiment, as such a countermeasure, the time for displaying the moving image using the character CP1 is set to 2 sec, and when the moving image display is executed at the end of the game round, it overlaps with the confirmed display time. By configuring in this way, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discomfort is suppressed. One of the features of this embodiment is that the device is devised to further reduce such a feeling of harmony.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the definite display time of the pattern in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is the same as the definite display time (1 sec) of the pattern in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. It is set to be. That is, the stop display time is configured so that there is no difference between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the stop display of the symbol and the stop display of the symbol are synchronized as in the first embodiment. In the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display of the symbol and the stop display of the symbol are synchronized during the special effect mode, and the stop display of the symbol and the stop display of the symbol are partially asynchronous during the normal effect mode. It is configured to be. Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the normal effect mode, the symbol is displayed as a standby display (temporary stop display) on the effective line of the variable display area ME, and a predetermined standby time (this implementation) from the start of the standby display. In the form of, the configuration shifts to the definite display at the timing when 1 sec) has elapsed.

In the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, the standby display control process, which is the process for standby display, is executed as a part of the display control process (periodic process). Hereinafter, the configuration related to the standby display will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the standby display control process executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, FIG. 55 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variation display mode and the standby display, and FIG. 56 is the standby display. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

(Standby display control process)
As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the standby control process, first, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the revariation display is being performed. In the present embodiment, in a part of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, a part of the symbol strings is re-variated from the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is displayed in standby mode, and the effective line is displayed at the time of final display. A display (re-variable display) may be executed in which the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed above is switched to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not this revariability display is being performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102 to determine whether or not the standby display is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103 to determine whether or not it is the standby display start timing. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 performs standby display, and the information is transmitted to the display control device 410. The MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 determines whether or not the game times to be started correspond to the reach display, and if it corresponds to the reach display, sets the standby display. In addition, when it corresponds to the complete deviation, it is determined whether or not the standby display is possible based on the number of subsequent pending information. Specifically, when the number of subsequent pending information is less than the predetermined number (two in the present embodiment), it is determined that the standby display is performed, and when the predetermined number is reached, the standby is performed. Judge that the display is not performed. That is, when the variable display time is greatly shortened by reaching a predetermined number of subsequent pending information, the standby display is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the standby display start process is executed in step S2104, and then the standby display control process ends. In the standby display control process, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the temporarily stopped displayed symbol group is oscillated in the scroll direction on the effective line.

Returning to the explanation of step S2102, if an affirmative judgment is made in the step S2102, that is, if the standby display is in progress, in step S2105 to proceed to step S2105, is the game time this time a game time related to the revariation display? Judge whether or not. As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby display → the re-variation display is executed in a part of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the re-variation display. That is, it is determined whether or not the timing is immediately before the confirmation display. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the revariable display start process is executed in step S2106, and then the standby display control process ends. In the re-variation display start processing, the scroll display of some symbol columns is restarted.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105 and it is determined that the game times do not correspond to the re-variation display, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display time in the current game round has elapsed (the timing when the fluctuation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, the final stop display process is executed, and then the standby display control process ends. In the final stop display process when the re-variation display is not performed, the symbol combination that is on standby display (during rocking) is stopped as it is on the valid line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the disengagement result is displayed as the final stop (the final stop display). Confirmation display).

Returning to the description of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in the step S2101, that is, if it is determined that the revariation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is the final stop display timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fluctuation display time in the current game round has elapsed (the timing when the fluctuation end command is received). If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, the final stop display process is executed, and then the standby display control process ends. In the final stop display processing when passing through the revariation display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the effective line of the symbol being scrolled, and the symbol combination is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display). ).

Next, the symbol display when the standby display occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 (a) illustrates the case of passing through the reach display, and FIG. 56 (b) illustrates the case of not passing through the reach display.

In FIG. 56 (a), the standby display by the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is executed after the reach display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the effective line. If the game round this time corresponds to the out-of-order result, the swing of all the symbols is released at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the out-of-order result is obtained. The final stop display (confirmed display) will be displayed on the valid line. As a result, the player will be clearly informed that the result of the deviation has occurred.

On the other hand, when the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the above-mentioned swing is canceled at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the standby display, and the middle symbol row is scrolled and effective. The symbol combination displayed on the line is changed from the one corresponding to the out-of-order result to the one corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, it will be clearly shown to the player that the big hit result has been obtained.

In addition, in the game times corresponding to the hit reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be displayed as the final stop display (confirmed display) without going through the standby display, but the ratio is the standby display → re-display. The number of symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result through the variable display is larger than that in the final stop display.

In FIG. 56 (b), the standby display by the symbol combination corresponding to the off result is executed without going through the reach display. In the standby display, each symbol constituting the symbol combination swings left and right on the effective line. If the game round this time corresponds to the out-of-order result, the swing of all the symbols is released at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the standby display, and the symbol combination corresponding to the out-of-order result is obtained. The final stop display (confirmed display) will be displayed on the valid line. As a result, the player will be clearly informed that the result of the deviation has occurred.

On the other hand, when the game times this time correspond to the jackpot result, the above-mentioned swing is canceled at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the standby display, and a part of the symbol sequence (for example, above). The symbol combination) scrolled and displayed on the valid line is changed from the one corresponding to the out-of-order result to the one corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, it will be clearly shown to the player that the big hit result has been obtained.

Next, the flow of the game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 57. As for FIG. 57, similarly to FIG. 54, the time related to the pattern display for the operation port display unit of the main display unit is set to Ta, and the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 (specifically, the variable display area ME and the reduced display area SE). The time related to the symbol display is distinguished as Tb.

When the time saving effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, as shown in the center of FIG. 57, the stop display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 (determined). Display time) Ta6 and the final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb6 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 match with the stop display start timing of the symbol on the operation port display unit. The timing of the final stop display start of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 coincides with that. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the special effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, as shown on the right side of FIG. 57, the stop display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 (determined). Display time) Ta7 and the final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb7 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the symbol display device 253 match with the stop display start timing of the symbol on the operation port display unit. The final stop display start timing of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) coincides with that. That is, the stop display of the pattern and the stop display of the pattern are synchronized.

On the other hand, when the normal effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (fixed display time) Ta5 of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87 is set. The final stop display time (confirmed display time) Tb5 of the symbol on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the symbol display device 253 coincides with the stop display start timing of the symbol on the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 253. Although the final stop display start timing of the symbol is the same, the total stop display time TbX (2 sec) including the standby display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 253 is longer than the confirmed display time Ta5 and Tb5 (1 sec). It has become. That is, in the symbol display device 253, the symbol is in a standby display state prior to the final display, and the stop display time is extended by the standby display. By extending the stop display time by the standby display, it is possible to secure the stop display time of the symbol to some extent. This is a preferable configuration for encouraging the player to understand the game result.

Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb8 coincides with the final display times Ta7 and Tb7. Therefore, even when the game times are composed of a plurality of parts by the first special effect or the like, it is possible to suppress that the boundary between the game times becomes conspicuous due to the difference between the temporary stop display time and the final stop display time. .. In this way, if the existing configuration is used well, a sense of incongruity will occur when the same effect as the effect in the time-saving effect mode is executed in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. Can be suitably suppressed. Further, while it is not necessary to switch the fixed display time according to the game state, the stop display of the symbol can be performed in a preferable manner according to the game state, so that it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in the sharpness of the game progress. ..

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the mode is set to shift to the special effect mode when the number of games executed in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode reaches a preset number of times. The trigger for shifting to the special effect mode may be changed as follows. That is, when the predetermined time condition is satisfied (for example, when the time elapsed in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode reaches the predetermined time or the predetermined time), the mode shifts to the special effect mode. It may be configured. Further, the player may be able to select the effect mode, and when the special effect mode is specified by the selection operation, the process may be changed to the special effect mode. It is also possible to use these various transition opportunities together.

(2) A plurality of types of the first special effects shown in each of the above embodiments may be provided. Specifically, as the first special effect, the first special effect A and the first special effect B having different jackpot expectations are provided, and when the reach display that results in the jackpot is executed, the first is a precursor. The configuration is such that the first special effect B is easily set as the special effect, and the first special effect A is easily set as the first special effect when the reach display resulting in the deviation is executed or when the reach display is not executed. It is also possible to. For example, regarding the girl character CP1 displayed in the first special effect, the broom color of the girl character CP1 is white in the first special effect A, and the broom of the girl character CP1 is set in the first special effect B. It is good to differentiate by making the color red.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the allocation of the first special effect and the second special effect in the later game times is determined in consideration of the number of continuous fluctuations across the game times. Not limited. The special pattern table can be simplified by restricting the number of continuous fluctuations to "0" at the end of the game rounds and eliminating the influence on the subsequent game rounds. However, if you try to complete the continuous fluctuation in each game in a situation where there is a lot of stored information (in a situation where the time saving function works greatly), there is a deviation from the time saving effect mode in which the game progresses at a good tempo. Becomes larger. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the configuration to determine whether or not the above regulation is possible according to the number of subsequent pending information. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display time is greatly shortened when the number of stored pending information is 2 or more, the above restriction is applied when the number of stored pending information is less than "2". , If it is "2" or more, the above restriction may not be applied.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when a command corresponding to the missed reach is received during the special effect mode, the first special effect is performed at the time before the shift to the reach display as a configuration for executing the missed reach display. The configuration is repeated, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when a command corresponding to the out-of-reach is received during the special effect mode, the notification / effect control device 140 may be configured to determine whether or not to display the reach. When the off-reach is not performed, the number of executions of the first special effect can be earned by targeting the entire section for division.

In each of the above embodiments, the configuration in which the reach display is executed only once during one game round is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It does not deny the configuration in which the reach display is executed multiple times during one game. In such a configuration, at least the reach display executed before the final reach display may be configured to notify the deviation result.

(5) Regarding the second special effect shown in each of the above embodiments, the execution time is configured to be longer than the execution time of the first special effect, but how long is the execution time of the second special effect? The length is arbitrary. For example, it may be the same length as the execution time of the first special effect, or may be shorter than the execution time of the first special effect.

Further, the third special effect shown in each of the above embodiments is configured so that the execution time is the same as the execution time of the first special effect, but how long is the execution time of the third special effect? It is optional as to whether or not to do so. For example, it may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first special effect. However, in view of the fact that the second special effect and the third special effect function as a stopper that cuts off the continuity of the first special effect, it is preferable to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect different.

In addition, when the notification / effect control device 140 determines the effect pattern, the allocation of the first special effect to the third special effect is facilitated, and the occurrence of excess or deficiency with the variable display time is alleviated. Then, it is technically significant to multiply the execution time of the second special effect and the third special effect by an integral multiple of the execution time of the first special effect set as the reference time.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement of the first special effect to the third special effect is determined at the start of the fluctuation, but after setting the first special effect for all, some parts are set as the second special effect. It is also possible to replace the second special effect and the third special effect at the start of the effect and the third special effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect pattern until the start of the second special effect or the third special effect. For example, it is possible to change the effect pattern by adding the subsequent pending information newly added after the start of the main game round, so that the cooperation between the previous and next game rounds can be strengthened.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, in the first special effect in the special effect mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation is temporarily stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the re-variable symbol combination (temporary stop symbol combination) may be temporarily stopped and displayed as in the normal effect mode. Further, it is also possible to make a configuration in which either the re-variable symbol combination or the completely out-of-order symbol combination is stopped and displayed according to the game result or the like.

Even if the re-variable symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first special effect in the special effect mode, when the second special effect and the third special effect are executed during the game round, It is preferable to differentiate from the first special effect by temporarily stopping and displaying the completely out-of-order symbol combination in the second special effect and the third special effect.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, various special pattern tables are configured so that the second special effect does not occur continuously for the purpose of gaining an opportunity for the first special effect to occur. It is also possible to change this and configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effect can occur continuously. Similarly, it is possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the third special effect can occur continuously. It is also possible to configure various special pattern tables so that the second special effect and the third special effect can occur continuously. It does not deny the combination of these patterns.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit of the first continuous number of times in the special effect mode is set in relation to the pseudo continuous variation display executed in the normal effect mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. The upper limit may be set independently of the pseudo continuous fluctuation display. Further, the upper limit does not have to be a variable parameter, but can be a fixed parameter.

Incidentally, in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation display, the case where the super reach or higher is confirmed when the number of consecutive times is 4 times and the big hit is confirmed when the number of consecutive times is 6 times is illustrated. It is optional whether or not to clearly indicate the variation display mode and the game result. Further, the maximum number of consecutive times in the pseudo continuous variation display may be arbitrarily changed.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the effect is displayed as a part of the advance notice effect straddling the game times during the time saving effect mode, and the effect is displayed even in the special effect mode. Can be omitted.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the number of continuous fluctuations and the effect level may deviate from each other in the effect display in the special effect mode. It is also possible to match the effect level with the effect level.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the case of shifting from the special effect mode to the normal effect mode via the third special effect is illustrated, but the same function can be added to the second special effect. .. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect pattern defined by the 9th special pattern table to the 12th special pattern table and increase the chances that the first special effect is executed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the execution time of the first special effect is set to one type (2 sec), but a plurality of execution times of the first special effect may be provided. Even in this case, it is preferable to consider the execution time of the game times in the high frequency support mode when setting the execution time. For example, in the first embodiment described above, 1 sec is set as the variable display time when the reach does not occur when the number of holds is 2 to 4, and 2 sec is set when the number of holds is 1. ing. In order to increase the execution time of the first special effect, the execution time of the first special effect to be added is 3 sec (variable display time 2 sec + temporary stop display time 1 sec) in consideration of the next shortest variable display time 2 sec + fixed display time 1 sec. Is preferable.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving effect mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the special effect mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol is displayed in the reduced display area SE on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. However, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to display the symbol in the variable display area ME as in the normal effect mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the number of parts (the number of times that the first special effect can be executed) is specified by an arithmetic process of dividing the variable display time or the section before the reach display transition by the reference time, and based on the specific result. Although the configuration is such that the first special effect to the third special effect are distributed, it is possible to omit the calculation process by storing the special pattern table corresponding to various variable display times. However, when each special pattern table is provided corresponding to various variable display times, it becomes difficult to standardize the special pattern table and the number tends to increase as compared with the case where the special pattern table is provided depending on the number of parts. In particular, when the execution time of the reach display is different even if the variable display time is the same (for example, refer to the second embodiment), such an inconvenience becomes remarkable. As described above, storing the special pattern table according to the number of parts has the technical significance that it can contribute to the reduction of the amount of information stored in the notification / effect control device 140.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the case where the definite display time in the low frequency support mode is shorter than the definite display time in the high frequency support mode is illustrated, but the definite display time in each mode is illustrated. The relationship is arbitrary. For example, the definite display time in the low frequency support mode and the definite display time in the high frequency support mode can be the same.

(17) In the second embodiment described above, a configuration in which a plurality of time required for reach display is provided when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode is illustrated, but the required time for reach display is illustrated. Is not limited to short / long, but is arbitrary. For example, it may be short / middle / long, or four or more.

Further, regarding the game times in which the super reach D is executed, when compared with the same variable display time, a plurality of timings from the start of the game times to the transition to the reach display are provided, but the difference between these timings is set. Does not necessarily have to be the same length as the above reference time. However, in order to make a difference in the number of continuous fluctuations (number of consecutive times) executed before the reach display by securing the execution time of the first predetermined effect by utilizing the difference in these timings, the difference is first. It is preferable to make it longer than the execution time (reference time) of the predetermined effect. As in the second embodiment, if this difference is set to be an integral multiple of the reference time, the smoothness of the flow of the effect is impaired in causing the difference in the number of continuous fluctuations. Can be suitably suppressed.

(18) In the third embodiment, the timing of transition to the reach display in the next game round is determined in consideration of the effect pattern of the previous game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. not. It may be configured to determine whether or not to consider the effect pattern of the previous game time according to the interval time from the previous game time. For example, if the next game round is started immediately after the end of the previous game round (that is, if the hold information of the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round), the previous game round While considering the effect pattern of, when the next game round is started after the end of the previous game round (that is, the hold information of the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round. If not), it is possible to configure the configuration without considering the effect pattern of the previous game. The criteria for determining consideration / non-consideration are not limited to the interval period = 0. The interval period as a criterion may be arbitrarily changed as long as it is within the range recognized by the player that the earlier game times and the subsequent game times are continuously executed.

(19) In the fifth embodiment described above, the standby display is performed by swinging the symbol in the scroll direction, but at least the symbol may be maintained on the effective line and may change again. It is sufficient if it can be suggested, and the specific mode of the standby display is arbitrary. For example, the symbol may be repeatedly enlarged / reduced on the effective line, or the symbol may be repeatedly changed from a low transparency state to a high transparency state, or the symbol or an effect associated with the symbol may blink. It may be configured to (flash).

(20) In the time-saving effect mode, the number of remaining games maintained in the high-frequency support mode is basically hidden, and in the special effect mode, the number of remaining games maintained in the special effect mode is not specified. Although explicitly stated, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to specify the information corresponding to the remaining number of times in each effect mode. For example, a counter indicating the number of remaining times may be displayed on the display screen 253a. In the time saving effect mode, the value of this counter is updated (for example, subtracted) according to the digestion of the game times, and in the special effect mode, the first special effect, the second special effect (reach display non-development), and the third It is preferable that the value of the counter is updated (for example, subtracted) every time various effects such as special effects are executed. As a result, the effect of resembling the special effect mode to the time saving effect mode can be more preferably exhibited.

As shown in the above embodiment, when the possibility of ending the special effect mode is determined by lottery, for example, when the special effect mode ends after the counter becomes "0". It is advisable to display (for example, a message such as "WARNING") indicating that the situation is not strange.

Further, it is possible that the special effect mode ends when the value of the counter becomes "0" and the above-mentioned delay or the like does not occur, but in this case, the last in the special effect mode. Please devise a production pattern in the game times. For example, an event such as the value of the counter becoming "0" during the game round, that is, an event such as shifting to the normal effect mode during the game round may occur, but in such a case, the counter becomes "0". It is preferable that the part up to is composed of the first special effect to the third special effect corresponding to the special effect mode, and the part after becoming "0" is composed of the effect corresponding to the normal effect mode.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the minimum number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is set to 10 times, but the minimum number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode is pseudo-variable with one game number (first special effect to third). It is optional as long as it is set to be more than the maximum number of times that special effects, etc. can be executed. In each of the above embodiments, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the maximum variation display time in the game times in which reach does not occur is 17 sec. In this variation display time, the number of parts is "9", and when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "3", the maximum number of executions of the pseudo variation is 7 times. On the other hand, the maximum fluctuation display time in the game times when reach occurs is 28 sec. In this variation display time, the number of remaining parts when the reach display time and the branch staging time are taken into consideration is "6", and the maximum number of executions of the pseudo variation when the upper limit of the number of consecutive times is "6" is 6 times. Will be. In such a case, it is advisable to set the minimum number of continuations to be 8 or more in consideration of the former. In line with this, it is advisable to set the minimum number of continuations to be 8 or more when the special effect mode is entered in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, a lower limit is set for the number of times the special effect mode is continued (the number of times pseudo-variation is executed), and after the lower limit is reached, whether or not the special effect mode can be continued is determined by lottery. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the number of continuations of the special effect mode (the number of executions of the pseudo-variation) match with the candidate for the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, in each of the game times in which the jackpot result is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) via the reach display, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, it is possible to make the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stop display (confirmed display) without going through the reach display in a part of the game times that result in the jackpot result. In such a configuration, in the game times that result in the jackpot, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) through the reach display, or the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result without going through the reach display. It may be configured to entrust the notification / effect control device 140 to determine whether to display the stop display (confirmed display). For example, when the game times that result in a big hit are executed during the special effect mode, the number of times the first special effect is executed (including at least the immediately preceding game times) in the game times executed before the corresponding game times (including the game times immediately before). That is, it is determined whether or not to display the reach in consideration of the number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the corresponding game times), and if it is decided to display the reach, the effect pattern in the corresponding game times, that is, The number of times the first special effect is executed may be determined in consideration of the number of times the first special effect is executed in the previous game (that is, the number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the corresponding game).

(24) In the configuration in which the first special effect is continuously performed across the game times by coordinating the previous game times and the later game times, the predetermined avoidance condition is satisfied during the interval between the two game times. It is also possible to have a configuration that avoids cooperation between the two game times, for example, a configuration that does not consider the effect pattern of the previous game time when determining the effect pattern in the later game times. The above-mentioned predetermined avoidance conditions are, for example, that the power of the gaming machine is turned off, that the control mode of the gaming machine is switched to the power saving mode that consumes less power than usual, and that the symbol display device 253 shifts to the demo display. It includes at least one of the above and the menu display for adjusting the volume and the like based on the operation of the player. When the game is substantially interrupted, the degree of freedom in setting the effect pattern in the later game times can be suitably improved by configuring the configuration so as not to consider the effect pattern of the previous game times.

(25) When the first special effect is repeated with the second special effect and the third special effect in between, the number of consecutive times of the first special effect before the second special effect and the third special effect, and the second after that. 1 Correlation may be given to the number of consecutive special effects. For example, when determining the number of consecutive times of the first special effect in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the ratio of the effect pattern that matches the previous consecutive number of times is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern that does not match. When determining the number of consecutive times of the first special effect in the game times that do not correspond to the jackpot result, the difference is set so that it becomes higher, and the effect pattern that matches the ratio of the effect pattern to match the previous consecutive number of times is matched. It is also possible to set the difference so that it is lower than the ratio of. In such a configuration, it is assumed that each of the above differences is increased so that the jackpot result is fixed or the expectation that the jackpot result will be high is high when the subsequent consecutive number of times and the previous consecutive number of times match. good.

(26) In the special effect mode, the effect pattern in the game times is determined at the start of the game times, but when a plurality of hold information is stored, the effect of each game time related to the hold information is performed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the patterns are collectively determined. For example, when the hold information is newly stored in the special effect mode, the effect pattern of each game related to the hold information and the hold information stored before that may be collectively determined. .. If the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which a special effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of game times as shown in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to contribute to the optimization of the effect pattern.

(27) In a configuration in which the expectation of a big hit result increases as the number of consecutive times of the first special effect increases, it is preferable to provide a branch effect as to whether or not the first special effect continues. That is, it is possible to provide an effect pattern in which the continuous number of times of the first special effect is inherited across the branch effect and an effect pattern in which the continuous number of times of the first special effect is not inherited across the branch effect. With such a configuration, when the first special effect is repeated, the first special effect can be divided into front and back by interposing a branch effect, so that even when the first special effect is repeated, the first special effect can be divided. It is possible to suitably suppress the number of consecutive times from becoming excessively large.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, as a part of the display effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the disengaged result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped) before the final display, but for example, a game corresponding to the jackpot result. In a part of the times, before the symbol combination is confirmed and displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, the symbol combination confirmed and displayed in this game round) is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped). It is also possible. For example, in a part of the case of notifying that the jackpot result is obtained through a plurality of first special effects → second special effects → third special effects, at least one of the plurality of first special effects corresponds to the jackpot results. The symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination that is confirmed and displayed in this game) may be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or temporarily stopped).

(29) When the information such as the success or failure in the subsequent game round is specified before the subsequent game round is started, the final stop is performed in the game round executed before the subsequent game round. The symbol combination (symbol combination to be confirmed and displayed) may be determined in consideration of the above specific result. For example, if the subsequent game round corresponds to the jackpot result, the subsequent game round is the jackpot result for the symbol combination that is finally stopped in the previous game round (corresponding to the missed result). It is preferable to use a symbol combination that suggests or clearly indicates.

Further, as shown in the above-mentioned modification (26), when the effect patterns of a plurality of game times are collectively determined, information such as whether or not the last game time to be executed among the plurality of game times is obtained is displayed. In consideration of this, it is also possible to determine the symbol combination of the game times to be executed before that (for example, the symbol combination to be finally stopped or the symbol combination to be temporarily stopped).

(30) The number of times of reach display executed during one game round is arbitrary, and it is also possible to configure the reach display to be executed a plurality of times. In this way, when executing the reach display multiple times during one game round, the number of times of the first special effect to be executed before the development timing to each reach display or the development timing to each reach display is changed in the game round. It may be stored in a patterned state according to the display time (for example, stored as an effect pattern table), and may be configured to select which effect pattern to use from these patterns. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect function by giving a correspondence to the front and rear reach displays, and to prevent the control load from becoming excessively large when determining the effect pattern.

For example, as shown in the above modification (17), when short, middle, and long are provided as the time for the reach display to be executed and a difference is provided for the execution time for the reach display, the jackpot result depends on the length of time. It is also possible to change the degree of expectation. When combining such a configuration with the configuration shown in this modification, the expectation level that will be a big hit result is changed by the combination of the earlier reach display and the later reach display, and the front and rear reach displays are linked. It is good to strengthen it. Specifically, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the expectation of a jackpot result changes depending on how the length and type of the earlier reach display and the length and type of the later reach display are combined. For example, if a long with a relatively high expectation is set as the length of the earlier reach display and a short with a relatively low expectation is set as the length of the later reach display, it is combined with other combinations. It is advisable to configure it so that the expectation of a big hit result is extremely high in comparison. According to the configuration shown in this modification, the degree of expectation as a big hit result changes depending on not only the number of consecutive times of the first special effect but also the relationship between the reach displays executed multiple times, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. Further improvement can be expected.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 are separately provided, but one control device that integrates the functions of the respective control devices 140 and 410 may be provided. ..

(32) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also applied to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Applicable.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features A1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result (big hit result) corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery with MPU 402 of device 162) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means is a period determination means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game turn operation for each game turn (a function of executing a change display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Have,
When the game rotation operation is performed, the variation display control process is executed by the effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game rotation operation. Function to do)
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided.
Based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game round is specified, and the game round is based on the specific result. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with an execution number determination means (a function of determining an effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect.

According to the feature A1, for example, the predetermined effect is repeated to the extent possible during the corresponding game round. In a gaming machine, it is common that various operation periods are set for reasons such as suppressing the monotonization of gaming. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various operation periods. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be suitably exerted.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "a prize processing for the operating port is performed by the information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions. The function to be executed), the acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. However, a grant determination means for determining whether or not the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player is supported (a function of executing processing such as a win / fail lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Then, after the game rotation operation is started, the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained, so that the game rotation operation is terminated as one of the game rotations, and the game rotation operation is performed. In a game machine provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the above-mentioned game turn control means is performed. For each game round, it has a period determining means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game round operation, and the game round operation is performed. 1 of the effect executed by the effect execution means, which is provided with an effect execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process by the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) to execute the effect when As a result, a predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and is based on the operation period determined by the period determination means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. The game machine is characterized by being provided with an execution number determination means (a function of determining an effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect to be executed during the game rotation. It is also possible to say.

Feature A2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result (big hit result) corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery with MPU 402 of device 162) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means is a period determination means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game turn operation for each game turn (a function of executing a change display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Have,
When the game rotation operation is performed, the variation display control process is executed by the effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game rotation operation. Function to do)
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided.
The number of times specifying means (notification / effect control device 140) for specifying the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game rotation based on the operation period determined by the period determining means and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Function to calculate the number of parts with MPU442) and
With the execution number determination means (function of setting the effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) to determine the number of executions to execute the predetermined effect during the game rotation based on the specific result by the number of times specifying means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A2, for example, the predetermined effect is repeated to the extent possible during the corresponding game round. In a gaming machine, it is common that various operation periods are set for reasons such as suppressing the monotonization of gaming. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to various operation periods. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be suitably exerted.

Feature A3. The feature A1 or feature A2 is characterized in that the execution number determination means is configured to determine the execution number of the predetermined effect based on the operation period, the effect execution period, and the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine described in.

By determining the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the determination result by the grant determination means, it is possible to impart a relationship between the determination result and the number of executions. For example, by making a difference in the number of executions between the case of the grant correspondence result and the case of not the grant correspondence result, it is possible to suggest the determination result by the predetermined effect. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature A1 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A4. The means for determining the number of executions is
A setting means for setting an upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination means (a function of setting the upper limit with the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).
It has a limiting means for limiting the number of times the predetermined effect is executed so that the number of times the predetermined effect is executed does not exceed the upper limit (a function of limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140). The gaming machine according to feature A3, which is characterized by being present.

In the configuration in which the number of times the predetermined effect is executed is determined according to the operation period as shown in the feature A1 or the like, the number of times the predetermined effect is executed increases as the operation period becomes longer. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times is set based on the result of the grant determination and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined within the range not exceeding the upper limit number of times, the predetermined effect is tentatively executed. Even when the number of possible times is large, the actual number of times of execution can be limited by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The effect executing means has a configuration in which, when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the degree of expectation, which is the result of the grant correspondence, is suggested by the number of times of the execution.
The means for determining the number of executions is
A setting means for setting an upper limit number of times (for example, the first consecutive number of times) based on the determination result by the grant determination means (a function of setting the upper limit by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).
A limiting means for limiting the number of times the predetermined effect is executed so that the number of times the predetermined effect is continuously executed does not exceed the upper limit (a function of limiting the number of consecutive times by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140). The gaming machine according to the feature A3, which is characterized by having.

In the configuration in which the number of times the predetermined effect is executed is determined according to the operation period as shown in the feature A1 or the like, the longer the operation period is, the more the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect is increased. However, if the relationship between the operation period and the number of executions becomes excessively strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the result of the grant determination. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times is set based on the result of the grant determination and the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect is determined within the range not exceeding the upper limit number of times, the predetermined effect is tentatively executed. Even when the number of possible times is large, the number of consecutive times can be adjusted to be small by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, "-when the predetermined effect is continuously executed-" means that the predetermined effect is executed again after the predetermined effect is completed, that is, another effect (for example, a second predetermined effect described later) intervenes. This includes the case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without doing anything.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect is the first predetermined effect.
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) different from the first predetermined effect is provided.
The limiting means is the number of times that the first predetermined effect is continuously executed by executing the second predetermined effect when the number of times that the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A5, which is characterized in that it is configured to limit.

According to this feature, the first predetermined effect is limited so as not to exceed the upper limit number of times by interposing the second predetermined effect. In a configuration in which the expected degree of the grant response result is suggested by the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect is used to prevent the continuation of the first predetermined effect while improving the attention to the game. It is also possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the continuation of the first predetermined production has ended.

The second predetermined effect includes, for example, a reach effect and a branch effect that is a branch of whether or not to develop into a reach effect.

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the above-mentioned technical idea to the above-mentioned feature A4. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect, and as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a second predetermined effect different from the first predetermined effect (for example, a first predetermined effect). (2 special effects and a third special effect) are provided, and the limiting means causes the second predetermined effect to be executed when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to the feature A4, which is characterized in that the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed is limited. "

Feature A7. When the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit, the limiting means executes the first predetermined effect before the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized in that it has a means for separating what is to be played and what is to be executed later.

By interposing the second predetermined effect in the first predetermined effect group, it is possible to suppress the number of executions of the first predetermined effect from becoming excessively small and the number of consecutive times from increasing.

As shown in the feature A6 and the feature A7, when the second predetermined effect is executed during the period in which the first predetermined effect can be executed, for example, a part of the first predetermined effect group is performed by the second predetermined effect. It is recommended to replace it.

Feature A8. In the case where the second predetermined effect is interposed, the limiting means is such that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. The first aspect in which the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect is larger than the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect, and the second aspect in which the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect. When the second aspect is less than the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect and the determination result by the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the second predetermined mode is more than the first aspect. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is configured so that an effect is often intervened.

When the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined effect in the game times corresponding to the grant determination result, the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect after the second predetermined effect is likely to increase. In the process of notifying the result of granting, the player's expectation can be suitably increased. If the number of consecutive first predetermined effects can be increased as much as possible (within the limit) in the part following the notification of the grant response result, the player's attention will be increased toward the notification while diversifying the production. Can be urged.

Feature A9. When the determination result by the grant determination is not the grant correspondence result, the limiting means is configured to intervene the second predetermined effect more often in the first aspect than in the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which is characterized by being present.

When the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined effect in the game times that do not correspond to the grant determination result, the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect before the second predetermined effect is likely to increase. , The effect shown in the above feature A8 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A6 to A9, wherein the execution period of the second predetermined effect is configured to be an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect.

As shown in the feature A6 and the like, in limiting the number of times (continuous number of times) of the first predetermined effect by using the second predetermined effect, the execution period of the second predetermined effect is set to the first predetermined effect as shown in this feature. The following effects can be expected by setting the execution period to an integral multiple (× 1, 2, 3 ...). That is, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the influence of the intervention of the second predetermined effect on the first predetermined effect, which should have been secured for the execution period, and the failure of the first predetermined effect to be executed well. .. Therefore, it is not possible to divert the result specified in advance, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of specifying the number of times and re-doing the staging layout. This is preferable in order to facilitate the progress of the production.

Feature A11. A related information storage means (continuous result counter in RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The limiting means is the upper limit number of times that the predetermined effect is continuously executed from the previous game time when the effect in the game time before the current game time is completed in the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A5 to the feature A10, which has a special limiting means for limiting the number of times the predetermined effect is executed so as not to exceed the above.

In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed during a game round, there is a possibility that the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round and the predetermined effect executed in the later game round appear to be continuous. be. Therefore, when the predetermined effect is executed at the end of the previous game round, the predetermined effect is continuously exceeded the limit by preventing the continuous number of times including the predetermined effect from exceeding the predetermined number of times. It is possible to suppress the appearance of being there. This is preferable in order to reduce the confusion of the player.

In addition, in the combination with the feature A6 to the feature A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be referred to as the "first predetermined effect".

Feature A12. The special limiting means limits the limitation when the interval period from the end of the predetermined effect in the previous game round to the start of the predetermined effect in the current game round does not exceed the reference period. The gaming machine according to feature A11, which is characterized in that it is configured to perform.

When each of the predetermined effects is performed in the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined in the next game after the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game times. Is easily affected by the period until the start of. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the above limitation when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, the effect shown in the feature A11 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A13. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means.
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Described in feature A11, the special limiting means is configured to perform the restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game is stored by the end of the previous game. Gaming machine.

When each of the predetermined effects is performed in the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined in the next game after the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game times. Is easily affected by the period until the start of. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature A11 can be achieved by setting the above restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round. It becomes possible to exert it suitably.

Feature A14. A related information storage means (continuous result counter in RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The execution number determination means is configured to determine the execution number of the predetermined effect in the current game based on the specific result and the execution status of the predetermined effect in the game before the current game. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A10.

If it is possible to associate the predetermined effect with the predetermined effect executed in the previous game time when the predetermined effect is executed in the current game time, the occurrence pattern of the predetermined effect is compared with the case where the predetermined effect is supported by the current game time alone. It is possible to diversify and improve the degree of freedom in setting a predetermined effect. In this way, it is advantageous to use the predetermined effect in the previous game times in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect.

In addition, in the combination with the feature A6 to the feature A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature may be referred to as the "first predetermined effect".

Feature A15. In the execution number determination means, the interval period from the end of the predetermined effect in the previous game round to the start of the predetermined effect in the current game round is a reference period (for example, the same time as the fixed display time: If it does not exceed 2 sec), the number of times the predetermined effect is executed in the current game is determined based on the specific result and the execution status of the predetermined effect in the game before the current game. The gaming machine according to feature A14, which is characterized in that it is used.

When each of the predetermined effects is performed in the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined in the next game after the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game times. Is easily affected by the period until the start of. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, the effect shown in the feature A14 can be suitably exhibited by configuring the configuration to cooperate between the game times when the interval period does not exceed the reference period.

Feature A16. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means.
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round, the execution number determination means has the specific result and the predetermined game round before the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the number of executions of the predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the execution status of the effect.

When each of the predetermined effects is performed in the previous and next game times, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is determined in the next game after the predetermined effects are completed in the previous game times. Is easily affected by the period until the start of. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the feature A14 shows the configuration in which the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored by the end of the previous game round, and the cooperation between the game rounds is planned. It is possible to appropriately exert the above effect.

Feature A17. The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the grant determination is the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Equipped with a means to identify the destination in
The feature of the execution number determination means is that the execution number of the predetermined effect in the game times before the game times specified by the destination identification means is determined based on the specific result by the destination identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to feature A16.

When the predetermined effect is repeated for one game time alone, it is assumed that the restrictions on the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, the number of consecutive times, and the like become stronger. For example, even if an attempt is made to increase the number of executions of a predetermined effect when the target game times correspond to the grant response result, it may not be possible to secure a sufficient number of executions depending on the operation period of the game times. Can occur. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when the number of executions of a predetermined effect is determined in the game times (this game time) before the game times that have been the target of the prior identification, the game that has been the target of the prior identification. By adding the destination-specific information related to the times, it is possible to realize the cooperation of the previous and next game times, and to prepare in advance for the shortage of the operation period as described above, for example.

Feature A18. The destination specifying means is a means for specifying the operation period of the game times related to the predetermined special information, and the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game times related to the predetermined special information based on the operation period. Have a means to identify
The effect executing means is a means for executing the predetermined effect at least at the end of the current game when the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in the game times related to the predetermined special information is less than the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized in that it has.

As shown in the feature A18, when the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in the later game times is less than the predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect is executed at least at the end of the current game times. The number of predetermined times of the game to be executed in the game times to the later game times can be brought close to the above-mentioned predetermined number of times.

Feature A19. The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the entry into the ball entry portion.
As the gaming state, a first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to enter the ball entry portion than the first gaming state are provided.
The operation period (variable display time) and the notification period (confirmed display time) of the game rotation operation are configured to be shorter in the second game state than in the first game state.
The effect executing means includes a variable display means (design display device 253) for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen 253a), and a variable display for variably displaying a pattern on the display screen as the predetermined effect. Including the stop display that stops and displays the pattern through the variable display.
The variable display period of the pattern in the predetermined effect coincides with the operation period in the second gaming state, and the stop display period of the pattern in the predetermined effect coincides with the notification period in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A18.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the monotonicization of the game can be suppressed by changing the progress speed of the game between the first game state and the second game state. Further, in the first gaming state, it is possible to change the progress speed of the game in a pseudo manner while maintaining the gaming state, which can contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game.

Feature A20. In the second gaming state, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display screen in accordance with the start of the game rotation operation, and the variable display of the pattern is maintained until the end of the game rotation operation, and then the grant is performed. The pattern corresponding to the result of the grant judgment by the judgment means is stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is a means for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined effect is executed corresponding to the end of the game round, as a means for stopping and displaying the pattern in the predetermined effect. The feature A19 is characterized in that the predetermined effect is provided with a means for stopping and displaying a pattern that does not correspond to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined effect is executed in response to a game other than the end of the game. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the same pattern display as the pattern display in the second game state can be reproduced in the first game state. That is, even if the gaming state remains the first gaming state, the appearance can be made to appear as if it were the second gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an impression as if the progress speed of the game is changing in a pseudo manner without changing the game state, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A19 or feature A20, wherein the predetermined effect is the same effect as the game turn effect executed in each game time in the second game state.

As shown in this feature, if the game rotation effect in the second game state is diverted to the predetermined effect, the effect of resembling the second game state can be more preferably exhibited.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve the degree of attention to gaming. " Is.

Feature B1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The transition determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (big hit information) executes a process such as a win / loss lottery. Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual. The game state transition means to be transferred (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
A display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
A display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying a combination of patterns corresponding to the determination result after variable display of a plurality of patterns is performed on the display screen is provided.
When the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the predetermined symbol combination (symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result) corresponding to the transition correspondence result is said before the transition to the special gaming state. It is a gaming machine that is stopped and displayed on the display screen.
As one of the variable display modes of the design on the display screen, the design stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined design combination, and at least a part of the design is being variably displayed. A special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) for shifting to a certain reach state is provided.
As a display effect executed before the reach state is reached in the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode, a predetermined setting is configured such that the effect execution period is shorter than the shortest period until the reach state is reached. Has a staging (for example, the first special staging)
The display control means is
Based on the period until the game turns to the reach state in the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed during the game times is specified. , A means for determining the number of executions (a function of determining the effect pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined effect is executed in the game based on the specific result.
It has an effect executing means (a function of executing a first special effect by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the predetermined effect based on the determination by the execution number determination means before the reach state is reached. A gaming machine characterized by being able to play.

According to the feature B1, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed before the transition to the reach state is specified based on the period until the transition to the reach state and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined number is determined based on the specific result. The number of times the effect is executed is determined. As a result, the predetermined effect is repeated, for example, to the extent possible before shifting to the reach state. In general, a gaming machine is configured to shift to a reach state at various timings for reasons such as suppressing the monotonization of the game. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of executions of the predetermined effect is determined after specifying how much the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined timing of transition to the reach state. It is possible to repeatedly execute a predetermined effect according to the mode of transition to the reach state. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the predetermined effect can be suitably exerted.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the effect executing means has a configuration that suggests an expectation level of transition to the reach state depending on the number of times the predetermined effect is executed.

The number of executions of the predetermined effect is related to the transition to the reach state. In such a configuration, the player's degree of attention tends to be suitable for a predetermined effect. Here, if it is possible to cope with the transition timing to various reach states by combining with the feature B1, the suggestion function by the predetermined effect can be suitably exhibited. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. The display control means has a configuration in which, when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the degree of expectation, which is the result of the transition, is suggested by the number of executions.
As the special variable display mode, a first special variable display mode and a second special variable display mode in which the period until the transition to the reach state is longer than that of the first special variable display mode are provided.
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the first special variable display mode is more easily set than the second special variable display mode when it is not a corresponding result.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of the migration support result, the period until the transition to the reach state tends to be longer than in the case of not the migration support result, and it is possible to increase the number of executions of the predetermined effect. Become. On the other hand, if it is not the transition correspondence result, the period until the transition to the reach state tends to be short, and the number of executions of the predetermined effect is reduced. According to the configuration as described above, the possibility that the result is the transition correspondence is high when the number of executions of the predetermined effect is large, and the possibility that the result is the transition correspondence is low when the number of executions of the predetermined production is small. A relationship is given to the result of the transition determination and the number of times the predetermined effect is executed.

Feature B4. The difference between the period until the transition to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the period until the transition to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is the effect execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which is configured to be an integral multiple of the period.

By setting the difference in the transition timing to the reach state to an integral multiple (× 1, 2, 3 ...) of the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the execution period of the predetermined effect can be secured by the difference. It is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated in order to realize the differentiation between the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode while facilitating the progress of the production.

Feature B5. The display control means has a transition timing determining means for determining the transition timing to the reach state based on the determination result by the transition determination means.
The feature B1 to the feature B4 is characterized in that the execution number determination means is configured to specify a period until the transition to the reach state based on the transition timing determined by the transition timing determination means. The gaming machine described in any one of.

It is preferable to set various timings for transition to the reach state in order to suppress the monotonousness of the game effect and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, if the transition timing is diversified, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed may be varied accordingly. Therefore, as shown in feature B4, in the configuration in which the transition timing to the reach state is determined based on the transition determination result, the period until the transition to the reach state is specified based on the result, and the specific result is used. A practically preferable configuration can be realized by configuring the configuration to determine the number of executions of the predetermined effect based on the configuration.

Feature B6. The execution number determination means is the first execution number determination means, and is
Based on the period until the game round ends in the game round that does not correspond to the special variable display mode and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during the game round is specified. A second execution number determination means for determining the execution number of the predetermined effect in the game round based on the specific result is provided.
The effect B1 to the feature B5 are characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect based on the determination by the first execution number determination means and the determination by the second execution number determination means. The gaming machine described in any one.

According to the feature B6, in the game times that do not shift to the reach state, the number of times the predetermined effect is executed is determined based on the execution period of the game times and the effect execution period of the predetermined effect. By configuring the predetermined effect to be executed even for the game times that do not shift to the reach state, it is possible to contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game for the player who expects to shift to the reach state.

When the technical idea shown in the feature A group is applied, the "second execution number determination means" shown in the present feature can be used as the "execution count determination means" shown in the feature A group. ..

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group described in detail above.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (mainly) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result (for example, the jackpot result) corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery with MPU 402 of the control device 162) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means is a period determination means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game turn operation for each game turn (a function of executing a change display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Have,
When the game rotation operation is performed, the variation display control process is executed by the effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game rotation operation. Function to do)
As an effect executed by the effect executing means, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 Special effect) is provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined effect, the expected degree of the grant correspondence result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. It has a structure that
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. (2) A gaming machine characterized by having means for dividing into a first predetermined effect executed before the predetermined effect and a first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect.

In the configuration in which the expected degree, which is the result of the grant response, is indicated by the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect, there is a concern that the difference between the expected degree suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result will be large. To. Here, it is possible to simply not perform the first predetermined effect, or to replace the beginning and end of the first predetermined effect group with the second predetermined effect, but in such a configuration, the first predetermined effect is used. The staging effect will not be exhibited well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and back by intervening the second predetermined effect, the chances of executing the first predetermined effect are suppressed from being excessively reduced. , It is possible to prevent the number of consecutive numbers from becoming excessively large. As a result, the above-mentioned deviation can be suppressed while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Therefore, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the first predetermined effect.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "a prize processing for the operating port is performed by the information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions. The function to be executed), the acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special stored in the acquired information storage means. Grant determination means for determining whether or not the information corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player (a function of executing processing such as a win / fail lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). ), And the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means after the game rotation operation is started, so that the game rotation operation is terminated is regarded as one game rotation, and the game rotation is performed. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the operation is performed. In the game machine, the game times control means has a function of executing a period determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to execute a variable display time setting process) for determining an operation period of the game times operation for each game time. ), Which varies depending on the effect executing means (design display device 253 and MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. A first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a first effect that are configured to have an effect execution period shorter than the operation period as an effect executed by the effect execution means. 2 Predetermined effects (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) are provided, and the effect executing means is the first predetermined effect when the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game. By interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect. It is also possible to say, "A game machine characterized by having a means for dividing into." It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the following features C2 to C11 to this configuration.

Feature C2. The effect executing means has means for setting an upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect based on the determination result by the grant determination means, and when the upper limit can be reached, the second predetermined effect is interposed. The feature is that the first predetermined effect is divided into a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and a first effect executed after the second predetermined effect. Features The gaming machine according to C1.

By setting an upper limit for the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect according to the result of the grant determination and interposing the second predetermined effect when the upper limit is exceeded, the first predetermined effect can be divided into, for example, the first half and the second half. By dividing, it is possible to suitably suppress that the first predetermined effect is excessively repeated in a form that does not match the result of the grant determination.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second predetermined effect is set so that the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect. ..

When the second predetermined effect is simply interrupted by the first predetermined effect group, an excess or deficiency may occur in the effect period due to the interruption of the second predetermined effect. This can be a factor that impairs the smoothness of the production progress. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the execution period of the second predetermined effect is an integral multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect, the second predetermined effect is executed instead of the predetermined number of the first predetermined effect. Therefore, the above excess and deficiency can be suppressed. As a result, the smoothness of the production progress can be ensured.

Feature C4. As a setting mode for setting the intervention portion of the second predetermined effect when the first predetermined effect group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is performed. In the first setting mode in which the number of times is larger than the number of times of the first predetermined effect executed later, and in the first predetermined effect in which the number of times of the first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect is executed later. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C3, wherein the second setting mode is provided, which is less than the number of times.

When the second predetermined effect is intervened, the number of times of the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect increases because the intervention point is closer to the front, and the intervention point is from the back. The number of times of the second predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect is reduced. With the configuration in which such a difference is provided, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonous effect by the configuration in which the first predetermined effect group is divided back and forth by the intervention of the second predetermined effect.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein when the determination result by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the configuration is more likely to be the second setting mode than the first setting mode.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the case of the grant correspondence result, for example, in the latter half of the game round, the first predetermined effect is likely to be continuous. In this way, according to the configuration in which the intervention position of the second predetermined effect is determined according to the game result, the first predetermined effect is divided into the first half / the second half by the intervention of the second predetermined effect, but the first A series of predetermined effects → For example, the original function of strengthening the connection of the effects of the reach display and suggesting the degree of expectation by repeating the first predetermined effect can be suitably secured.

Feature C6. An information display means (for example, an effect displayed on the display screen 253a) for displaying the number of times correspondence information corresponding to the number of times that the first predetermined effect is continuous, and
A feature characterized by comprising means for resetting the number of times correspondence information displayed on the information display means when the first predetermined effect is executed after the second predetermined effect is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to feature C5.

By displaying the information corresponding to the number of times when the first predetermined effect is continuous, it becomes easy to grasp how many times the present is continuous even if there is an oversight or the like. When the second predetermined effect intervenes in such a configuration, it is clearly shown that the continuation of the first predetermined effect has stopped by resetting the number of times correspondence information. As a result, it becomes clear that the second predetermined effect is an opportunity to stop the continuation of the first predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent the content from becoming difficult to understand due to the complexity of the effect.

Feature C7. A display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
It is provided with display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the grant determination. ,
When the result of the determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen.
The effect executing means performs a display effect using a pattern displayed on the display screen.
The first predetermined effect is configured to variably display the symbols on the display screen so that the symbols are combined to be a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the granting result, and temporarily stop and display the symbols on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C6, which is characterized by being present.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by executing the first predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game, it is possible to make it appear as if the progress speed of the game has changed significantly. However, in such a configuration, the game may become monotonous by repeating the first predetermined effect in a short cycle. Therefore, by intervening the second predetermined effect in the first predetermined effect group, the monotonicization of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in a configuration in which the degree of expectation as a result of granting is high due to the continuation of the first predetermined effect as shown in feature C1, excessive continuity of the first predetermined effect is a factor that confuses the player. It is not preferable because it becomes. In this respect, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by the configuration in which the continuation of the first predetermined effect is stopped by the intervention of the second predetermined effect.

Feature C8. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game turn operation for each game turn.
When the game rotation operation is performed, the variation display control process is executed by the effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game rotation operation. Function to do)
As an effect executed by the effect executing means, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 Special effect) is provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined effect, the expected degree of the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of consecutive times. It is composed and
The effect executing means is
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the first predetermined effect is placed before the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. A means for dividing the first predetermined effect to be executed and the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect,
When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the second predetermined effect is arranged before or after the first predetermined effect to make the first predetermined effect continuous. A gaming machine characterized by being.

As shown in the feature C8, in the configuration in which the expectation degree which is the grant correspondence result is shown by the continuous number of times of the first predetermined effect, the expectation degree suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result There is concern that the divergence will increase. Here, it is possible to simply make a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect is not exhibited well. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the continuous number is suppressed from becoming excessively large by intervening the second predetermined effect, the above-mentioned deviation is ensured while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the first predetermined effect.

Feature C9. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game turn operation for each game turn.
When the game rotation operation is performed, the variation display control process is executed by the effect execution means (the symbol display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that executes the effect in parallel with the game rotation operation. Function to do)
As an effect executed by the effect executing means, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a second special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period. 3 Special effect) is provided, and when the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined effect, the number of consecutive times suggests the degree of expectation as the result of the transition. It is composed and
When the second predetermined effect is executed in the game after the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the effect executing means may perform the first predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. 2 A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a predetermined effect.

As shown in the feature C9, in the configuration in which the expectation degree which is the grant correspondence result is shown by the continuous number of times of the first predetermined effect, the expectation degree suggested by the excessive continuation of the first predetermined effect and the actual game result There is concern that the divergence will increase. Here, it is possible to simply make a configuration in which the first predetermined effect is not performed, but in such a configuration, the effect of the first predetermined effect is not exhibited well. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the continuous number is suppressed from becoming excessively large by intervening the second predetermined effect, the above-mentioned deviation is ensured while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effect. Can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted by the first predetermined effect.

Feature C10. As the game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than that of the first game state are provided.
The first predetermined effect is an effect executed once in each game in the second game state.
In the first game state, the operation period of each game is configured so that the first predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times.
A feature C1 to a feature C9 characterized in that the effect executing means is configured to execute the first predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game when the first game state is set. The gaming machine described in any one.

According to the feature C10, in the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if it is in the second game state by repeating the first predetermined effect during one game turn. In other words, the rhythm of the game progress can be greatly changed by making it appear as if the game progress has accelerated at once. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and more preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C11. When the first predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, the effect executing means performs the first predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects. 2 The first predetermined effect executed before the predetermined effect and the first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect are divided, and the second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect executed after the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C10, which comprises means.

As shown in the feature C1 and the like, in the configuration in which the first predetermined effect is continuously executed, the first predetermined effect is continuously performed so as to straddle the previous and next game times, so that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect is increased. It can be excessive. For example, when the outline of the effect is determined in the later game times, it is possible to prevent the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect from becoming excessive by considering the execution status of the first predetermined effect in the previous game times. It is feared that the configuration in which the outline of the staging is always determined in consideration of the previous game times may cause a large control load and a strong restriction on the determination of the outline of the staging. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first predetermined effect is divided back and forth by the second predetermined effect, the effect of one game can be completed by the second predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence on the subsequent game times and preferably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

As shown in this feature, when the second predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during one game, for example, another second predetermined effect other than the last second predetermined effect (second second predetermined effect) is executed. 2 It is preferable that the predetermined effect (the first second predetermined effect) does not correspond to the grant correspondence result.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group to the feature C group described in detail above.

<Characteristic D group>
The following feature D group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to improve the degree of attention to gaming. " Is.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information (a function of executing a process such as a winning / losing lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
Based on the transition correspondence result that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual. The game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
Display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And with
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the transition correspondence result, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. There,
As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D), which is one of the variable display modes of the pattern on the display screen,
Before the stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least a part of the patterns is variably displayed. The first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state, and
A second special variable display mode (long) is provided in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode.
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode, and the determination result by the determination means is the transition. A gaming machine characterized in that the second special variable display mode is easier to set than the first special variable display mode when it is not a corresponding result.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the reach state changes according to the result of the transition determination. As a result, the monotonicization of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in the case of a transition response result, by positively delaying the transition timing to the reach state, it is possible to suitably earn an execution period such as an effect that arouses expectations for the transition to the reach state. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game during the period before the transition to the reach state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is as follows: "The winning process for the operating port is performed by the information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition conditions. The function to be executed), the acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the transition information. A determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination means is performed, and a transition correspondence result that the result of the determination by the determination means corresponds to the transition information. Based on the above, the game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) executes the game state transition process to shift the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. Function), a display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display screen, those symbols correspond to the determination result by the determination means. It is equipped with display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying a stop in the combination of the above, and when the determination result by the determination means becomes the transition correspondence result, the special gaming state is entered. A game machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition, and is one of the variable display modes of the symbols on the display screen (for example, a special variable display mode). As Super Reach D), before the stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination and at least a part of the above. The first special variable display mode (short) in which the pattern shifts to the reach state in which the pattern is being variably displayed, and the second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode. When the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the first special variable display mode is easier to be set as compared with the case where the determination result is not the transition correspondence result. When the determination result by the determination means is not the transition correspondence result, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second special variable display mode is easier to be set as compared with the case where it is the transition correspondence result. " It is also possible to do.

Further, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Whether or not the acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the transition information. The determination means (the function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the determination result by the determination means correspond to the transition information. Based on this, a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than usual, and a display. After variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display unit (design display device 253) having a screen (display screen 253a) and the display screen, those symbols are stopped at a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. When the display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) to be displayed is provided and the judgment result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the above is performed before the transition to the special gaming state. A gaming machine in which a predetermined combination of patterns corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen, and corresponds to the determination result as a special variable display mode which is one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen. Before the stop display of the pattern combination to be performed, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least a part of the pattern shifts to the reach state in which the variable display is in progress. A first special variable display mode (short) and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode are provided, and the variable display means is provided. When the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the means for which the variable display mode of the pattern is the first special variable display mode and the determination result by the determination means are not the transition correspondence results. In some cases, it is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized by having a means for making the variable display mode of the pattern the second special variable display mode. "

Feature D2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the migration information (a function of executing a process such as a winning / losing lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. (A function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the game state transition means.
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
Display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) that display a plurality of patterns in a variable manner on the display screen and then stop and display the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And with
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the transition correspondence result, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. There,
As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) of the pattern executed on the display screen,
Before the stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination, and at least a part of the patterns is variably displayed. The first special variable display mode (short) that shifts to a certain reach state, and
A second special variable display mode (long) is provided in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode.
As the setting mode of the variable display mode in the normal game state, a first setting mode (normal effect mode) and a second setting mode (special effect mode) are provided.
In the first setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the first special variable display mode is more easily set than the second special variable display mode. ,
In the second setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the second special variable display mode is more easily set than the first special variable display mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the reach state changes according to the transition correspondence result and the setting mode. As a result, the monotonicization of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in the first setting mode, if the result is a transition response result, the transition timing to the reach state can be easily set to be earlier, so that the execution period of the effect or the like in the reach state can be appropriately gained. In the setting mode, if the result is a transition correspondence result, the transition timing to the reach state is likely to be delayed, so that the execution period such as the effect of inciting the transition to the reach state can be suitably earned. This can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game during both the period during the reach state and the period before the transition to the reach state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is as follows: "The winning process for the operating port is performed by the information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition conditions. The function to be executed), the acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to the transition information. It is assumed that the determination means (a function of executing processing such as a win / loss lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination means and the result of the determination by the determination means correspond to the transition information. Based on the transition correspondence result, the gaming state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A function to execute the transition process), a display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display screen, the symbols are determined by the determination means. When the display control means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying a stop display in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is provided and the determination result by the determination means becomes the transition correspondence result, A gaming machine in which a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state, and a special variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen ( For example, as Super Reach D), the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination and at least a part thereof before the stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result. The first special variable display mode (short) in which the pattern shifts to the reach state in which the pattern is being variably displayed, and the second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of shifting to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode. ), And as the setting mode of the variable display mode in the normal game state, a normal setting mode (normal effect mode) and a special setting mode (special effect mode) are provided, and in the special setting mode. Is characterized in that, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the second special variable display mode is more easily set than the first special variable display mode. It is also possible to say "machine."

Feature D3. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, first special effects) configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period until the reach state is reached. It is configured so that it can be executed multiple times, and when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the number of executions suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the transition.
The second special variable display mode is characterized in that the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is set to be longer than that of the first special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to D1 or feature D2.

According to the feature D3, in the second special variable display mode, the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than that in the first special variable display mode. That is, in the case of the transition correspondence result, the transition to the reach state is delayed, so that the chance of executing the predetermined effect during the period can be increased.

Feature D4. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured such that the period until the pattern combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D3.

If the period is the same and the timing of transition to the reach state is different, the effect shown in the feature D1 or the like can be exhibited while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine.

Feature D5. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a predetermined effect configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached. It is configured so that when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the expected degree of the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of executions.
The difference between the timing of shifting to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the timing of shifting to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D4, which is characterized by being

As shown in the feature D5, if the difference in the transition timing is set to be an integral multiple of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect can be executed as many as the integer multiple. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excess or deficiency in the execution time of the effect due to the difference in the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, that is, the distortion of the flow of the effect in any of the special display modes. As a result, the smoothness of the production progress can be ensured.

Feature D6. In the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, first special effects) configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period until the reach state is reached. It is configured so that it can be executed multiple times, and when the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the number of executions suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the transition.
A means for determining an upper limit for determining the upper limit of the number of times of continuous execution of the predetermined effect is provided based on the determination result by the determination means.
When the result of the determination by the determination means is the migration correspondence result, the upper limit determining means has a configuration in which the upper limit is likely to be higher than when the migration result is not the migration correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D5.

As shown in feature D6, in the case where the expected degree of the transition correspondence result is suggested by the number of continuous executions of the predetermined effect, if the period until the transition to the reach state is shortened, the period becomes substantial. The number of consecutive times will be limited. In this case, even if it is originally desired to continue the predetermined production up to the upper limit, there is a concern that the execution opportunity will be impaired. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature D1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the above-mentioned substantial limitation can be relaxed.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature C group to the feature D group described in detail above.

<Characteristic E group>
The following feature E group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features E1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (hit / fail information) executes a process such as a win / fail lottery. Function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result (hit result) that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. The game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to the mode), and
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
Variable display means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And with
When the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the gaming machine in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. And
As a variable display mode of the pattern executed on the display screen when the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination. In addition, there is provided a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) that shifts to a reach state in which at least a part of the patterns are in variable display.
Related information storage means (continuous result counter in RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the variable display mode of the previous game times, and
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, the transition timing determining means (notification / effect control) for determining the transition timing to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 of the device 140 is provided with a function of determining the transition timing to the reach display).

According to the feature E1, in the game times corresponding to the special variable display mode, the transition timing to the reach state is determined according to the variable display mode in the previous game times. In this way, by coordinating the previous game times and the current game times, it is possible to realize diversification of the production mode. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached. When the predetermined effect is continuously executed, the number of executions suggests the degree of expectation as the result of the transition.
The transition timing determining means is when the variable display in the previous game round is completed by the predetermined effect and the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode in the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to determine the transition timing to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means.

Depending on the execution period of the game times, for example, it may be difficult to earn a predetermined number of consecutive times of the game times by the game times alone. In a configuration in which the expected degree as a result of transition correspondence is suggested by the continuous number of times of a predetermined effect, the relationship between the continuous number of times and the expected degree is likely to be broken by strengthening such a restriction. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the previous game round is completed in the predetermined game round, the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round is diverted to the current game round. be able to. That is, by determining the timing of transition to the reach state according to the previous game times, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the number of consecutive times. Therefore, it is possible to make good use of the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by a series of predetermined effects.

Feature E3. Information acquisition means (a function to execute a winning process for a working port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (hit / fail information) executes a process such as a win / fail lottery. Function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result (hit result) that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution) that is more advantageous to the player than usual. The game state transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to the mode), and
A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
Variable display means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410) for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the patterns in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. And with
When the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition correspondence result, the gaming machine in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the transition correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special gaming state. And
As a variable display mode of the pattern executed on the display screen when the gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination. In addition, there is provided a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) that shifts to a reach state in which at least a part of the patterns are in variable display.
In the special variable display mode, it is configured so that a predetermined effect configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously executed. When it is executed, the number of executions suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the migration.
Related information storage means (continuous result counter in RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round, and
When the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode, the transition timing determining means (notification / effect control) for determining the transition timing to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 of the device 140 is provided with a function of determining the transition timing to the reach display).

Depending on the execution period of the game times, for example, it may be difficult to earn a predetermined number of consecutive times of the game times by the game times alone. In a configuration in which the expected degree as a result of transition correspondence is suggested by the continuous number of times of a predetermined effect, the relationship between the continuous number of times and the expected degree is likely to be broken by strengthening such a restriction. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, by determining the transition timing to the reach state in the current game round in consideration of the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round, for example, the execution is performed in the previous game round. It is possible to divert the predetermined production to this game. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the number of consecutive times, and to effectively exert the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the continuous production of a predetermined effect.

Feature E4. When the previous game round is completed by the predetermined effect, the continuous number of times specifying means for specifying the number of times the predetermined game round is continuously executed by the start of the current game round, and
A setting means for setting the continuous number of times of the predetermined effect in the current game round based on the determination result by the determination means is provided.
The transition timing determining means is characterized in that the transition timing in the current gaming round is determined based on the number of times specified by the continuous number of times specifying means and the continuous number of times set by the setting means. Or the gaming machine according to the feature E3.

According to the configuration shown in the feature E4, when the predetermined effects are continuous by the start of the current game round, the transition timing to the reach state is determined based on the continuous number of times and the set number of times in the current game round. Will be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably exert the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by continuously performing a predetermined effect.

In addition, "continuous" shown in this feature means a case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of another effect different from the predetermined effect.

Feature E5. When the interval period from the end of the previous game round to the start of the current game round exceeds the reference period (for example, 2 sec), the pachinko machine is provided with a regulating means for restricting the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E4, which is characterized by being present.

In coordinating with the previous game times, determining the transition timing in consideration of the previous game times under the situation where the interval period is excessively large is a factor that causes a sense of discomfort in the above cooperation. Can be. Therefore, by setting a reference period as a criterion for determining whether or not cooperation is possible and refraining from unreasonable cooperation when the actual interval period exceeds this reference period, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature E6. When the previous game times are game times corresponding to the transition to the reach state, the features E1 to E1 to be characterized in that the regulation means for restricting the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E5.

When the player shifts to the reach state in the previous game round, the result of the current shift determination is displayed with the end of the reach effect, so that the end of the game round becomes clear. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort due to unreasonable cooperation by configuring the configuration so as not to cooperate with the previous game times.

Feature E7. In the special variable display mode, it is configured so that a predetermined effect configured so that the execution period becomes a predetermined period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, and the predetermined effect is continuously executed. When it is executed, the number of executions suggests the degree of expectation that is the result of the migration.
The transition timing determining means is configured to select one from a plurality of transition timing candidates, and the transition timing is defined so that the timing difference is an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E6.

In adjusting the number of executions of a predetermined effect, the difference in transition timing is an integral multiple of the execution period of the predetermined effect as described above, so that an excess or deficiency occurs in the effect period when adjusting the number of executions of the predetermined effect. Can be suitably suppressed.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature D group to the feature E group described in detail above.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features F1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means (a function of executing a gaming rotation control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game round control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) in which the notification result is maintained for each game round. Has a function to execute the variable display time setting process on the MPU402 of
It is provided with an effect executing means (design display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect execution means is the predetermined effect during one game. It has a continuous execution means to continuously execute the production,
The continuous execution means is characterized in that the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round is executed so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period in the game round.

According to the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeated in the game times, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding at a good tempo. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, if the maintenance period of the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination becomes extremely short, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that the notification result will be overlooked. On the other hand, if the maintenance period is simply lengthened, the predetermined effect that is repeated at a good tempo stops between the game times, which may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, since the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round is executed so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period of the game round, the predetermined effect is performed in the next game round. The blank until it is restarted can be reduced. As a result, even if the maintenance period of the notification result is set to be long to some extent, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by it can be suppressed.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the operation period is not divisible by the execution period of the predetermined effect.

By setting the execution period of the predetermined effect and the operation period of the game round operation to be non-integer multiples, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round spans the operation period and the maintenance period. be able to.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than the remainder when the operation period is divided by the execution period of the predetermined effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the game times are continuously executed, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect executed at the end of the previous game times from extending to the next game times. It is preferable to avoid interference with the next game round in order to secure the relationship between the game round operation and the effect parallel to it.

Features F4. As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the first game state. (Normal game state) and
The predetermined effect is an effect executed once in one game round in the second game state.
In the first game state, the operation period of each game is configured so that the predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times.
The effect executing means is any one of the feature F1 to the feature F3, which is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game when the first game state is set. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature F4, in the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if it is in the second game state by repeating a predetermined effect during one game turn. In other words, the rhythm of the game progress can be greatly changed by making it appear as if the game progress has accelerated at once. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and more preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature F1 or the like to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from being conspicuous.

Feature F5. A display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
After variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display screen, display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 140) for displaying the final stop display in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the grant determination means. With 410)
When the predetermined effect is executed at the end of the game round, the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen so that the symbols are combined with the symbols corresponding to the granting correspondence result, and the final effect is displayed on the display screen. It is configured to be stopped and displayed, and if it is not executed at the end of the game, the symbols are variably displayed on the display screen, and these symbols are combined with the symbol combination that does not correspond to the grant correspondence result. It is configured to temporarily stop and display on the display screen so that
The temporary stop display period in which the temporary stop display is executed and the final stop display period in which the final stop display is executed are configured to be shorter than the maintenance period. Features F1 to F4 The gaming machine described in any one of.

By repeating the predetermined effect (variable display of the pattern → temporary stop display), it is possible to make it appear as if the games are progressing one after another. Since the blank between predetermined effects generated at the end of the game round can be reduced, the break when the predetermined roll is restarted at the next game round can be made inconspicuous.

Feature F6. As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the first game state. (Normal game state) and
The predetermined effect is an effect executed once in one game round in the second game state.
In the first game state, the operation period of each game is configured so that the predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times.
The effect executing means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game when the first game state is set.
The second maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the second gaming state, is configured to be shorter than the first maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the first gaming state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the temporary stop display period in which the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect has the same length as the second maintenance period.

By setting the temporary stop display period to the same length as the second maintenance period as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be made more suitable. However, in such a configuration, the difference between the temporary stop display period and the first maintenance period becomes conspicuous. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature F1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state can be easily specified from the staging mode.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature E group to the feature F group described in detail above.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features G1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game round control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) in which the notification result is maintained for each game round. Has a function to execute the variable display time setting process on the MPU 402 of
A production execution means (design display device 253) for performing an effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is performed is provided.
The effect executing means has a display unit (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and after variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display screen, the symbols are determined by the grant determination means. It has variable display means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying the final stop in a combination corresponding to the result.
As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the first game state. (Normal game state) and
A normal effect mode and a special effect mode are provided as the effect mode of the effect execution means in the first game state.
In the normal effect mode, the display of the pattern on the display screen shifts to the first stop display before the end timing of the game rotation operation, and the first stop is performed at the same timing as the end timing of the game rotation operation. It is configured to shift from the display to the final stop display.
In the special effect mode, the first stop display is restricted, and the display of the pattern on the display screen is configured to shift to the final stop display at the same timing as the end timing of the game rotation operation. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first gaming state where the progress speed is relatively slow, by shifting from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode, the prior stop display that has been executed up to that point is avoided, and the prior stop display is avoided. The final stop display will be executed without going through the display. This makes it appear as if the period for which the notification result is maintained has been shortened. In this way, if the configuration is such that the progress speed of the game is changed in a pseudo manner without shortening the maintenance period of the notification result by the predetermined notification means, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the degree of attention to the game is improved. Can contribute to.

The "shifting from the first stop display to the final stop display" shown in this feature includes a configuration in which the final stop display is shifted to with the pattern combination displayed by the first stop display.

Feature G2. Described in feature G1, the maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode in the first gaming state. Gaming machine.

Features Temporary stop display executed in a series as shown in G1 → In order to realize the differentiation between the normal effect mode and the special effect mode by using the final stop display, the maintenance period is maintained in both effect modes. Even if they are common, the difference in the progress speed can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if there is a difference in the progress speed of the game while avoiding the complexity of the basic operation of the game machine related to the game turn control means.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. ..

For example, when a difference is provided in the operation period and the maintenance period in each game state, the above-mentioned difference in the progress speed can be clarified and the sharpness can be emphasized by performing the variable display → stop display of the pattern accordingly. However, considering that the maintenance period is a period for notifying the player of the grant determination result, it is not preferable to make the maintenance period extremely short in order to increase such a difference, and the maintenance period is set. It is not preferable to make it extremely long because it gives the player the impression that the game is unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, it is practically difficult to increase the above difference. In this respect, if the maintenance period is the same regardless of the gaming state and the difference is generated by the first stop display shown in the feature G1, such a restriction can be suitably alleviated.

Features G4. The advance stop display is configured so that the opportunity for the same symbol combination as the final stop display to be stopped and displayed is greater than the opportunity for the pattern combination different from the final stop display to be stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G3.

Features As shown in G1 etc., the first stop display → the last stop display is a series, so in the configuration where the stop display period is shown to be long, it stands out that the first stop display is tentative to the last, and the above features The effect shown in G1 will not be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by mainly using a pattern that directly connects the first stop display to the final stop display, it is possible to impress the player as if the first stop display is a part of the final stop display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4, wherein the period in which the first stop display is executed is the same as or shorter than the period in which the final stop display is executed. ..

When the first stop display is changed to the last stop display, the first stop display period becomes excessively long, so that the deviation from the operation of the predetermined notification means becomes conspicuous. It is feared that this will give the player the impression that the game is unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, in the case of the first stop display → the last stop display, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suppressed by limiting the first stop display period to be equal to or less than the final stop display period.

Feature G6. The maintenance period determined by the period determining means is configured to be the same in the normal effect mode and the special effect mode in the first gaming state.
As one of the effects performed in parallel with the game rotation operation by the effect executing means, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided. Ori,
When the special effect mode is set, the effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a plurality of times between the start of the game rotation operation and the end of the game rotation operation, and the game. It has a means for finally stopping and displaying the plurality of patterns at the end of the diversion operation.
The predetermined effect includes a configuration in which the plurality of patterns displayed on the display screen are variably displayed and then temporarily stopped.
One of the features G1 to the feature G5, wherein the temporary stop display period when the temporary stop display is executed in the predetermined effect is configured to have the same length as the maintenance period. The gaming machine described in.

It is not preferable that there is a difference between the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period in order to make the game progress faster by repeating the variable display of the pattern → the temporary stop display in the special effect mode. This is because the conspicuous difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display is an opportunity to determine the end timing of the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period are configured to match, even if the game times move to the next game time while the predetermined effect is repeated, the temporary stop is temporarily stopped. It becomes difficult to understand the difference between the display and the final stop display, and it becomes difficult to specify the boundary between the game times. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the function of generating a pseudo change in the traveling speed.

Feature G7. The predetermined effect is the same effect as the effect executed in the game times in the second game state, and the execution period is the same as the sum of the operation period and the maintenance period in the second game state. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the special effect mode during the first gaming state, it is possible to make it appear as if the transition to the second gaming state has occurred. Here, according to the combination with the feature G6, both the temporary stop display and the final stop display in the special effect mode have the same appearance as the final stop display in the second gaming state, so that the above mimicry effect is preferably achieved. It can be demonstrated.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature F group to the feature G group described in detail above.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features H1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result (big hit result) corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery with MPU 402 of device 162) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. A game provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 87). In the machine
The game turn control means is a period determination means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game turn operation for each game turn (a function of executing a change display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Have,
MPU 442 of the effect executing means (design display device 253 and notification / effect control device 140) that executes a predetermined effect (for example, the first special effect) in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Equipped with a function to execute variable display control processing)
As the predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period are provided, and the effect execution means performs the first predetermined effect during the operation period. It is configured to be executed repeatedly,
The first predetermined effect is configured to suggest the degree of expectation as a result of the grant correspondence by the number of times the first predetermined effect is continuously executed without the intervention of the second predetermined effect.
Information on the operation period when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, and the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. And the means to identify the destination in
Based on the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determination means and the information specified by the prior identification means, the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined. A gaming machine, characterized in that it is provided with means for determining an execution mode.

In the configuration shown in the feature H1, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect. Here, when the first predetermined effect is to be continued by the subsequent game times alone, the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect is influenced by the operation period of the subsequent game times. Therefore, even though the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect should be set to be large, an event may occur in which the actual number of consecutive times is less than the preferable number of times. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when determining the execution mode (number of times or arrangement) of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round, the operation period of the later game round is taken into consideration. To. As a result, for example, when it is unlikely that the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect can be sufficiently secured by the subsequent game times alone, the first predetermined effect can be started in advance in the current game times. It is possible to make up for the shortage in the game times. In addition, when the number of times of the first predetermined effect is likely to be excessive by taking over the number of consecutive times of the first predetermined effect in this game time, the continuation of the first predetermined effect in this game time is suppressed. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature H2. The destination specifying means sets the information regarding the grant determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. It has a function to specify at the timing before it becomes
The execution mode determining means specifies the number of times that the first predetermined effect can be continuously executed from the information specified by the prior identification means, and is based on the specific result and the operation period in the current game round. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined.

As shown in the feature H2, by first specifying the grant determination result and the information of the operation period for the subsequent game times, it is possible to grasp the continuous number of times of the first predetermined effect corresponding to the subsequent game times. Based on this, by determining the production mode in this game round, the function shown in the feature H1 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature H3. A display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
After variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to be a combination of patterns corresponding to the determination result. ) And
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen.
As one of the variable display modes of the design on the display screen, the design stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined design combination, and at least a part of the design is being variably displayed. There is a special variable display mode that shifts to a certain reach state,
When the game times this time correspond to the special variable display mode, the execution mode determination means is restricted from determining the execution mode based on the information specified by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

As shown in the feature H3, when the current game times correspond to the transition to the reach state, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are set according to the later game times. The restrictions on the production in the game times increase. It is feared that this will be a factor that causes the production to become obsolete in this game. Therefore, in such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect without considering the subsequent game times.

Features H4. A display means (design display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and
After variable display of a plurality of patterns on the display screen, display control means (notification / staging control device 140 and display control device 410) for stopping and displaying the patterns so as to be a combination of patterns corresponding to the determination result. ) And
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the display screen.
As one of the variable display modes of the design on the display screen, the design stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes a part of the predetermined design combination, and at least a part of the design is being variably displayed. There is a special variable display mode that shifts to a certain reach state,
When the game times targeted for the destination identification correspond to the special variable display mode, the destination identification means relates to a period of the operation period in the game times until the game transitions to the reach state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H3, which is characterized in that it has a configuration for specifying information.

When the later game times correspond to the special variable display mode (reach), the feasible period of the predetermined effect is greatly limited. That is, the executable period of the predetermined effect is limited to the period before the transition to the reach state. Therefore, as shown in feature H1, when linking with the current game round, it is preferable to link the game round by specifying information regarding the period until the transition to the reach state in the later game round. Can be.

Feature H5. The execution mode determining means is the operation period in the current gaming time determined by the period determining means and the information specified by the destination specifying means when the later gaming times correspond to the special variable display mode. The gaming machine according to the feature H4, which is characterized in that the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game round is determined based on the above.

As shown in the feature H4, when the later game times correspond to the special variable display mode (reach), the operation period of the current game times and the transition to the reach state in the later game times. By determining the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game in consideration of the period, the technical idea shown in the feature H4 can be suitably embodied.

Feature H6. When the later game times are taken into consideration when the execution mode determining means determines the execution mode in the current game times, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the current game times are taken by the execution mode determining means. The feature H4 or the feature H5 is characterized in that the execution mode of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the subsequent game round is determined together when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is determined. The gaming machine described in.

In the case of linking the current game round and the later game round, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the execution mode in the later game round is also determined when the execution mode in the current game round is determined. .. By restricting the modification of the execution mode in the later game times in this way, it is possible to prevent the support function of the later game times from being poorly exerted by the current game times.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature G group to the feature H group described in detail above.

<Characteristic I group>
The following feature group I is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variablely displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. With the winning of the operating port as an opportunity, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a winning state is generated, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. Regarding the background technique that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1), "In recent years, attention has been paid to the game. Various measures have been taken to enhance this. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. " Is.

Features I1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means (a function of executing a gaming rotation control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game turn control means is a period determination means for determining an operation period (variation display time) of the game turn operation for each game turn (a function of executing a change display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Have,
It is provided with an effect executing means (design display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect to a third special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect execution means is one game. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect multiple times during the rotation.
Information that is updated with the execution of the predetermined effect and that stores the number of times information corresponding to the number of times that the predetermined effect is executed (game count counter in the RAM 444 of the notification / effect control device 140). ,
A means for executing a predetermined game process when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (the effect mode in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to switch between.

For the predetermined effect shown in the feature I1, the effect execution period is set shorter than the operation period of the game rotation operation, and the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during the game rotation. According to the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game times, for example, the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than the case where the predetermined game process is executed triggered by the progress of the game times. It can give the player the impression that it is, and can also contribute to the diversification of the timing. As a result, diversification of game production and the like can be realized, and it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means (a function of executing a gaming rotation control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game round control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) in which the notification result is maintained for each game round. Has a function to execute the variable display time setting process on the MPU402 of
It is provided with an effect executing means (design display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect to a third special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect execution means is one game. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect multiple times during the rotation.
A number-of-times information storage means for storing number-of-times information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect is executed, and
The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) that is larger than the maximum number of times (for example, 7 times) that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game. A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a predetermined game process based on the fact (a function of switching the effect mode by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).

For the predetermined effect shown in the feature I1, the effect execution period is set shorter than the operation period of the game rotation operation, and the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times during the game rotation. By repeating the predetermined effect at a pitch shorter than the game times, the number of times information is updated, and when the predetermined effect is repeated over a plurality of game times, the predetermined number of times reaches the predetermined number of times and the predetermined game is played. The process will be executed. According to such a configuration, for example, the game gives the impression that the timing at which the predetermined game process is executed is faster than the case where the predetermined game process is executed triggered by the progress of the game times. It can be given to people, and it can also contribute to the diversification of the timing.

It should be noted that the predetermined game is based on the fact that the number of times stored in the number-of-times information storage means reaches a predetermined number of times, which is larger than the maximum number of times the predetermined effect can be executed in one game. The description "a gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a process" is described as "a predetermined game process is executed based on the number of times stored in the number-of-times storage means reaches a predetermined number of times." The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is configured to be more than the maximum number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in one game time. " It is possible.

Feature I3. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the satisfaction of predetermined acquisition conditions (a function of executing a winning process for a working port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player. (Function to execute processing such as winning / failing lottery) and
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means (a function of executing a gaming rotation control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game round control means is a period determining means (main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation and a maintenance period (fixed display time) in which the notification result is maintained for each game round. Has a function to execute the variable display time setting process on the MPU 402 of
It is provided with an effect executing means (design display device 253) that performs an effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed.
As the game state, the first game state (normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode) and the second game state (corresponding to the high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the first game state. (Normal game state) and
The effect executing means is
A first execution means for executing a first effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period in the first game state a plurality of times in the game times in the first game state.
It has a second execution means for executing a second effect in which the effect execution period is the same as the operation period in the second game state once in the game times in the second game state.
A first storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the first effect is executed, and
A second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the second effect is executed, and
When the information stored in the first storage means or the second storage means becomes the information corresponding to the predetermined reference information, the processing execution means for executing the predetermined game processing is provided. A featured gaming machine.

In the first game state in which the progress speed of the game is slower than that in the second game state, the first effect is repeatedly executed during one game, and the number of times the first effect is executed reaches the reference number (reference information). Is executed a predetermined game process. The progress speed of the pseudo game in the first game state can be made close to that in the second game state. In such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing rapidly even in the first game state where the progress speed is originally slow, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the first game state. Can contribute.

Feature I4. The effect data storage means for storing the effect data of the effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein both the first effect and the second effect are effects executed using predetermined effect data stored in the effect data storage means.

The same effect as the second effect executed in the second game state where the game progress speed is fast will be reproduced in the first game state, as if the transition from the first game state to the second game state has occurred. Can be made to look like. This can contribute to suppressing the monotonicization of the game.

The configuration shown in this feature may be "the gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first effect is the same as the second effect."

Feature I5. A first effect setting mode and a second effect setting mode are provided as the effect setting mode of the effect execution means in the first game state.
The first execution means is configured to execute the first effect a plurality of times in the game times in the second effect setting mode when the second effect setting mode is set in the first game state. The gaming machine according to the feature I3 or the feature I4, which is characterized by being

According to the feature I5, the first effect setting mode / the second effect setting mode is switched during the first game state, and by shifting to the second effect mode, the game is played in the same manner as the second game state. You can make it look as if the progress is accelerating.

Feature I6. When the information stored in the first storage means becomes the information corresponding to the predetermined reference information, the process executing means sets the effect setting mode from the second effect setting mode to the first effect setting mode. The gaming machine according to any one of feature I3 to feature I5, which is configured to shift to a mode.

According to the feature I6, when the first effect executed in the second effect setting mode reaches the reference number of times, the effect setting mode is switched to the first effect setting mode. With such a configuration, the sharpness of the game progress can be strengthened.

Feature I7. The process executing means has a configuration in which the effect setting mode is set to the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the second storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information. The gaming machine according to feature I6, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature I7, the behavior in the second effect setting mode of the first gaming state can be brought close to the behavior of the second gaming state, as if the behavior of the first gaming state was changed to the second gaming state. You can enhance the false other effects that you show.

Feature I8. A reference information setting means for setting the predetermined reference information is provided.
The feature I2 to the feature I2 to feature that the reference information setting means has a means for setting the same information as the predetermined reference information set in the second gaming state in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I7.

According to the feature I8, the behaviors of the case of the second gaming state → the first effect mode and the case of the first game state (second effect mode) → the first effect mode can be brought close to each other. This is preferable in order to enhance the mimicry effect that makes it appear as if the player has transitioned to the second game state during the first game state.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature H group to the feature I group described in detail above.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the firing thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guidance passage 103) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (game nail 38, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE). A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game area forming body, 82 ... Variable winning device, 83a ... Upper operating port, 83b ... Lower operating port, 87 ... Main display unit, 91 ... Electric role Object, 140 ... Notification / effect control device, 162 ... Main control device, 253 ... Symbol display device, 253a ... Display screen, 402 ... MPU, 403 ... ROM, 404 ... RAM, 410 ... Display control device, 442 ... MPU, 443 ... ROM, 444 ... RAM, ME ... variable display area, PE ... game area, SE ... reduced display area.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
Acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player.
The game round operation is performed with the end of the game round operation as one of the game rounds when the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is obtained after the game round operation is started. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to be described.
The game turn control means has a period determining means for determining an operation period of the game turn operation and a maintenance period in which the notification result is maintained for each game turn.
A production execution means for performing an effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is performed is provided.
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is provided, and the effect execution means continuously executes the predetermined effect during one game rotation. Has continuous execution means,
The continuous execution means is characterized in that the predetermined effect executed at the end of the game round is executed so as to straddle the operation period and the maintenance period in the game round.

Images